Thales ATM 435 LICENSED NON-BROADCAST TRANSMITTER User Manual USERS MANUAL 2

Thales ATM LICENSED NON-BROADCAST TRANSMITTER USERS MANUAL 2

1. USERS MANUAL 1
2. USERS MANUAL 2

USERS MANUAL 2

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	857503
Application ID	LUsEAjAPfOPo//h6moF33A==
Document Description	USERS MANUAL 2
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	291.6kB (3644952 bits)
Date Submitted	2007-10-22 00:00:00
Date Available	2007-12-07 00:00:00
Creation Date	2006-02-07 18:51:37
Producing Software	Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows)
Document Lastmod	2007-09-05 14:21:25
Document Title	Microsoft Word - DME 400 STD eng vol 1 sect02 Instal sept05 _jan06ok_.doc
Document Creator	Acrobat PDFMaker 7.0.5 for Word

Description, Installation, Operation, Maintenance
Reference: Vol. 1 Code 955 900 031 C
GROUND BEACON
DME 415/435
Technical Manual
VOLUME 1
Equipment description, Installation, Operation, Maintenance and PC user
SECTION 2
INSTALLATION
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- Air Systems Division
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
2-II
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
Table of CONTENTS
Paragraph
Page
SECTION 2 ...........................................................................................................................................2-1
INSTALLATION...................................................................................................................2-1
2.1
General installation information ........................................................................................2-1
2.1.1
Safety Precautions ...........................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1.1
General rules ....................................................................................................................2-1
2.2
INSTALLATION PRELIMINARY.......................................................................................2-2
2.3
INSTALLATION SITE SELECTION..................................................................................2-2
2.4
EQUIPMENT SITE LOCATION........................................................................................2-3
2.5
UNPACKING, PACKING AND SHIPPING; ......................................................................2-3
2.6
Typical INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2-3
2.6.1
Installation cables .............................................................................................................2-4
2.6.2
Grounding .........................................................................................................................2-8
2.6.3
Power supply connection..................................................................................................2-8
2.6.3.1
Batteries............................................................................................................................2-13
2.6.3.1.1
Battery duration time (on 230Vac black-out) ....................................................................2-13
2.6.4
ANTENNA CONNECTION ...............................................................................................2-14
2.6.4.1
Antenna coax cables-Attenuations and delays ................................................................2-15
2.6.4.2
Data entry calibration procedure for “EXTENDED CONFIGURATION”...........................2-15
2.6.4.2.1
Check of the OUTPUT POWER measurement on transponder ......................................2-17
2.6.4.2.2
Measurement calibration of the TRANSMITTED POWER (radiated) ..............................2-17
2.6.5
Adjustment Power Reading by monitor ............................................................................2-19
2.6.6
I/O and external interface connections.............................................................................2-20
2.6.7
Link set - Jumper presetting .............................................................................................2-30
2.6.8
Associated Facility Interface.............................................................................................2-35
2.6.9
Remote Control and Status Indicator ...............................................................................2-41
2.6.10
PC Installation...................................................................................................................2-42
2.6.11
Power supply with BCPS subrack of Frako type (optional version) .................................2-43
2.6.11.1
External power supply 48Vdc connection (Frako subrack) ..............................................2-43
List of FIGURES
Figure
Figure 2.1.
Figure 2.2.
Figure 2.3.
Figure 2.4.
Figure 2.5.
Figure 2.6.
Figure 2.7.
Figure 2.8.
Figure 2.9.
Figure 2.10.
Figure 2.11.
Figure 2.12.
Page
AUX OUT I/O cable ........................................................................................................2-4
AUX IN I/O cable ............................................................................................................2-5
PC serial cable ...............................................................................................................2-5
RS232 External Modem cable........................................................................................2-6
Interface Facility cable....................................................................................................2-6
RF coax cable - LCF 1/2" ...............................................................................................2-7
Obstruction light cable ....................................................................................................2-8
Installation connections (typical) ....................................................................................2-9
Installation - Cables connections (typical) on top end of equipment..............................2-10
Installation - Cables connections (typical) on bottom of cabinet ....................................2-11
Cable connection - Grounding and AC power supply of the Terminal Bar ....................2-12
Cables connection - Grounding and AC power supply .................................................2-12
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
2-a
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
Figure
Figure 2.13.
Figure 2.14.
Figure 2.15.
Figure 2.16a.
Figure 2.16b.
Figure 2.17.
Figure 2.18
Figure 2.19
Figure 2.20.
Figure 2.21.
Figure 2.22.
Figure 2.23 .
Figure 2.24.
Figure 2.25.
Figure 2.26.
Figure 2.27.
Figure 2.28.
Figure 2.29.
Figure 2.29a.
Figure 2.29b.
Figure 2.30.
Figure 2.31.
Figure 2.32.
Figure 2.33.
Page
Grounding and external 48 Vdc power supply - Cables connection.............................. 2-13
Battery connections typical ............................................................................................ 2-13
Cable connections to FAN 96 antenna .......................................................................... 2-14
Simplified diagram of Antenna coax cables................................................................... 2-16
“EXTENDED CONFIGURATION” – Example of data entry .......................................... 2-16
MON module – Trimmer adj. position of the “Transmitted Power” measurement ......... 2-18
Screen of correct measurement by Monitor 1 & 2 ......................................................... 2-19
Screen of configuration for power reading adjustment .................................................. 2-19
I/O panel, top view ......................................................................................................... 2-21
Parallel Input Lines application ...................................................................................... 2-28
Parallel Output Lines application ................................................................................... 2-29
List of Links Set on CSB Module ................................................................................... 2-30
Links Setting on CSB Module ........................................................................................ 2-31
Links Setting on DMD Module ....................................................................................... 2-32
Links Setting on MON Module ....................................................................................... 2-33
Links Setting on TX Module ........................................................................................... 2-34
Header plugs setting on AFI Module.............................................................................. 2-36
AFI Module - Input and output signals application......................................................... 2-37
AFI Module – Association example with VOR/ILS 400.................................................. 2-38
AFI Module – Association example with VOR/ILS NORMAC........................................ 2-39
Equipment associated examples ................................................................................... 2-40
Remote Control and Status Indications connection examples ...................................... 2-41
PC connection examples ............................................................................................... 2-42
BCPS subrack of Frako type - Supply cables connection ............................................ 2-43
List of TABLES
Table
Page
Table 2-1 - List of typical installation cables......................................................................................... 2-4
Table 2-2 - RF coax cable LCF 1/2" CU2Y type - Technical specification........................................... 2-7
Table 2-3 - STD Coax cables ............................................................................................................... 2-15
Table 2-4 - Loss of STD coax cables ................................................................................................... 2-17
Table 2-5 - Monitors power alarm threshold examples ........................................................................ 2-18
Table 2-6a - SK1 on I/O panel and front panel - Serial Ports PC connector pin-out signals ............... 2-21
Table 2-6b - PL1 and PL2 on I/O panel - Serial Ports MDM connector pin-out signals....................... 2-22
Table 2-7a - PL3 on I/O panel - INPUT Parallel Port Connector pin-out signals ................................. 2-23
Table 2-7b - SK2 on I/O panel - OUTPUT Parallel Port Connector pin-out signals............................. 2-24
Table 2-7c - PL4 on I/O panel (optional) - INPUT Parallel Port connector pin-out signals .................. 2-25
Table 2-7d - SK3 on I/O panel (optional) - OUTPUT Parallel Port Connector pin-out Signals ............ 2-26
Table 2-8 - PL7 on I/O Panel - Telephone line Connector pin-out signals........................................... 2-27
Table 2-9 - SK4 and SK5 on I/O Panel - AFI Connectors pin-out signals........................................... 2-27
Table 2-10 - AFI Connectors pin-out signals........................................................................................ 2-35
2-b
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
SECTION 2
INSTALLATION
2.1
GENERAL INSTALLATION INFORMATION
2.1.1
Safety Precautions
It is the task of the site supervisor or construction manager to make available the materials supplied by
THALES Italia s.p.a., independently procured special materials and tools. For every site, strict attention
should be paid to safety regulations issued by the local authorities.
2.1.1.1
General rules
The following rules should be observed for prevention of accidents:
Consumption of alcohol in any form is forbidden on the installation site.
Drunken persons or those under influence of alcohol will not be tolerated on the installation site.
Protective goggles and safety gloves are to be worn when work is being carried out on batteries. Rinsing
water, soda and several cleaning cloths should be available.
Sturdy shoes, safety gloves and safety helmets are to be worn.
Protruding nails, strips etc. must be removed immediately. Ladders and planks must always be carefully
checked before use.
Do not tread on protruding plank sections.
Never leave objects on scaffolding or ladders.
Scaffolding or frames are to be erected sturdily and must always be tested before use.
Test electrical devices and extension cables for accident safety.
Remove fuses before carrying out work on mains.
Wear protective goggles when carrying out sanding or drilling operations.
Sand off burr from chisels and punches in good time.
Test striking tools for tightness of fit.
Do not put pointed or sharp objects into working-clothing pockets.
Jewelry such as chains and rings should be removed when working on building sites - especially when
working with electrical devices.
Always keep escape routes clear.
Every employee on an installation site should know:
• where the First-Aid box is kept
• the telephone number of the nearest casualty doctor and eye specialist
• where the fire extinguisher is kept
• the location of hazardous areas on the way to the work place, or at the work place itself.
Damage caused by animals is highly improbable. The door of the shelter or equipment room should be
locked in the absence of the personnel.
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
2-1
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
2.2
INSTALLATION PRELIMINARY
The operator must perform the following operations when installing the beacon:

Select and prepare the site;

Unpacking, Paging and shipping;

Typical installation
• ground the equipment;
• connect the power supplies;
• connect the antenna.
• I/O connections
The following connections may also be necessary, depending on the beacon configuration selected
and the options used:
• connection the facility with associated equipment;
• connection with other equipment.
2.3
INSTALLATION SITE SELECTION
The area in which a DME is to be installed is determined by the responsible Civil Aviation Authority
according to the international air traffic regulations.
The area is dependent on the type of obstacle. Also clearance and runway configuration (e.g. overrun,
clearway, stopway) in case located in terminal area.
The following site selection guidelines are general recommendation and only guiding values for information.
The exact values are locally dependent decisions, which are made during installation. They are computed
with formulas, which take in account of terrain, obstacles and other. See Appendix "A – DME Antenna Siting
Area Criteria", on this volume.
The installation is determined by means of a site survey at which a surveyor must always be present.
THALES Italia s.p.a. is able to provide engineering consultants on site for this survey.
The DME installation area selection depends on the following using conditions:
1) Terminal Area beacon
a) DME (substituting or integrating MARKER functions) placed with ILS equipment
In this case, DME antenna, usually directional antenna, is mounted on Glide Slope antenna mast
and the DME equipment is installed into Glide Path shelter.
b) Stand-alone
DME with omnidirectional antenna on its own mast and equipment installed into a suitable
shelter. The area is dependent on clearance and runway configuration.
2) In route beacon
(External zone site and normally far away from terminal area), with or without associated VOR
equipment: see Appendix "A – DME Antenna Siting Area Criteria", on this volume
2-2
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
2.4
955 900 031 C
EQUIPMENT SITE LOCATION
The ground beacon may be installed in a control room or inside a shelter, which complies with the
environmental temperature, humidity and pressure values listed in Section 4. Bear in mind that the
equipment has the following overall dimensions:
− height: 1730 mm,
− width: 580 mm,
− depth: 635 mm cabinet code 297509007or 610 mm cabinet code 297509004
the amount of space around the equipment must be as follows:
− more than a value between the rear part of the beacon and the wall or any other piece of equipment, to
allow the operator to open the rear door of the equipment.
Make it possible support the back part of the cabinet to a wall, in as all the operations of cables and
connectors assemblage, could be performed on front.
− a minimum of 30 cm between the top of the beacon and the ceiling of the control room or the shelter to
leave space for the external connection cables and to allow access to the antenna connector and to the
antenna probes connectors;
− a minimum of 60 cm between the front of the beacon and the wall or any other piece of equipment, to
allow the operator to open the front door.
The base must be able to support the total weight of the equipment (approx. 200/230 kg including the
optional modules) within the range of dynamic stress envisaged for the equipment.
The beacon does not normally need securing; if it is to be secured to the base, however, four M12 bolts
should be used and their fixing holes.
2.5
UNPACKING, PACKING AND SHIPPING;
The equipment should be unpacked as soon as possible in order to check that it is complete and intact. The
place of storage used for any intermediate storage period must be dry. The temperature range specified in
the technical data section 4 must be conformed to. The check list is inside the packing to which to refer.
The DME beacon and modules will be packed according to the national and international standards. The
packing procedure may be slightly different according to the way of shipping or to the destination country.
2.6
TYPICAL INSTALLATION
Figure 2.8 shows all the connections for beacon installation. Should this use an I/O system provided with the
LCSU unit in standard configuration; this figure also illustrates the characteristics of the cables used for
installation and provided by the manufacturer, as listed in table 2.1. The main characteristics of installation
cables are on figures 2.1 to 2.7. The reference item is shown on figures, internal at a circle.
WARNING
Before connecting the cables check that the mains lead is dead and that the battery is not
connected (the breaker of mains and battery, on external electrical switchboard, must be OFF).
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
2-3
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
2.6.1
Installation cables
. The main characteristics of installation cables are on figures 2.1 to 2.7. and in table 2-1.
Table 2-1 - List of typical installation cables
REF.
CABLE
LENGTH
(m)
NOTE
GROUND CABLE (option)
15
Single wire section:25 mm . External wire
covering: Ø=11 mm, green/yellow color
MAINS POWER SUPPLY CABLE (option)
15
Three wires section 2,5mm each – External
cable covering Ø=15,2 mm
BATTERY CABLE (RO) (option)
15
Single wire section:10 mm External wire covering: Ø=7,6 mm; red color
BATTERY CABLE (NE) (option)
15
Single wire section:10 mm External wire covering Ø=7,6 mm; black color
AUX OUT I/O CABLE (option)
10
see figure 2.1
AUX IN I/O CABLE (option)
10
see figure 2.2
LOCAL PC SERIAL CABLE
see figure 2.3
RS-232 EXTERNAL MODEM CABLE (option)
see figure2.4
INTERFACE FACILITY CABLE
10
see figure 2.5
10
TELEPHONE CABLE (option)
15
Two pair twisted wire telephone cable (screened )
11
LOW LOSS ½” ANTENNA CABLE
25
see figure 2.6.
12
LOW LOSS ½” MONITOR CABLE
25
see figure 2.6.
13
LOW LOSS ½” MONITOR CABLE
25
see figure 2.6.
14
OBSTRUCTION LIGHT CABLE (option)
25
see figure 2.7 Three wire 1,5 mm shielded cable
14
Db 25
( 25 pins
Male)
PL2
25
To I/O panel (SK2)
OUT Parallel port
PIN
n°
Wire Covering
Color
White
Brown
Green bright
Yellow
Gray
Pink
Bleu (dark)
Red
Black
PIN
n°
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Wire Covering
Color
Violet
Orange
Bleu (light)
Green (dark)
WHITE/bleu
WHITE/violet
WHITE/red
WHITE/pink
WHITE/black
Figure 2.1.
2-4
PIN
n°
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Wire Covering
Color
WHITE/brown
WHITE/green
WHITE/yellow
WHITE/gray
YELLOW/black
YELLOW/red
YELLOW/bleu
13
pin side view
NOTE
• Reference item of table 2-1:
n°5
• Signal assignment:
see table 2-4b
• Cable screen on the
connector cover
AUX OUT I/O cable
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
14
Db 25
( 25 pins
Female)
SK3
AUX IN I/O cable
13
COD. 041917043T
To I/O panel (PL3)
IN Parallel port
PIN
n°
Wire Covering
Color
White
Brown
Green bright
Yellow
Gray
Pink
Bleu (dark)
Red
Black
PIN
n°
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Wire Covering
Color
Violet
Orange
Bleu (light)
Green (dark)
WHITE/bleu
WHITE/violet
WHITE/red
WHITE/pink
WHITE/black
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Figure 2.2.
14
PIN
n°
25
pin side view
Wire Covering
Color
NOTE
WHITE/brown
WHITE/green
WHITE/yellow
WHITE/gray
YELLOW/black
YELLOW/red
YELLOW/bleu
• Reference item of table 2-1:
n°6
• Signal assignment:
see table 2-4a
• Cable screen on the
connector cover
AUX IN I/O cable
Db 25
( 25 pins
Male)
25
PC
PL1
Db 9
( 9 pins Female)
13
pin side view
pin side view
To I/O panel (SK1)
PC RS232 port
To PC
typical COM1 port
PIN PL1 Signal
n° assignment
PIN PL1 Signal
n° assignment
PIN PL1 Signal
n° assignment
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
RXD
TXD
CTS
RTS
DTR
GND
DCD
DSR
RI
Figure 2.3.
Vers. D, September 2005
PIN PC Signal
n° assignm.
DCD
RXD
TXD
DTR
GND
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI
NOTE
• Reference item of table 2-1:
n°7
PC serial cable
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
2-5
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
14
Db 25
( 25 pins
Male)
Db 25
( 25 pins
Female)
SK2
SK1
MDM
25
13
pin side view
PIN
n°
Signal
assignment
TXD1/2
RXD1/2
RTS1/2
CTS1/2
DSR 1/2
GND
DCD1/2
13
To I/O panel (PL1,2)
RS232 Serial port 3,2
To MODEM
PIN
n°
PIN
n°
Signal
assignment
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
TXCK1/2
RXCK1/2
Figure 2.4.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
NOTE
• Reference item of table 2-1:
n°8
DTR1/2
RI 1/2
RS232 External Modem cable
Db 25
( 25 pins
Male)
PL4
PL5
25
To I/O panel (SK4,5)
Assoc. Facility EQPT
AF1,2
Wire Covering Color
STD
Alternative
PIN
n°
Wire Covering Color
STD
Wire Covering Color
PIN
n°
STD
White
Black
10
Violet
Oran/blck
19
WHITE/brown
Bleu/red
Brown
White
11
Orange
Bleu/blk
20
WHITE/green
Red/gre
Red
12
Bleu (light)
Black/whi
21
WHITE/yellow
Oran/gre
Green
bright
Yellow
Green
13
Green (dark)
Red/white
22
WHITE/gray
Blk/Wh/rd
Gray
Orange
14
WHITE/bleu
Green/wh
23
YELLOW/black Wh/blk/rd
Pink
Bleu
15
WHITE/violet
Bleu/whit
24
YELLOW/red
Rd/blk/wh
16
WHITE/red
Black/red
25
YELLOW/bleu
Gr/blk/wh
Bleu (dark) White/blk
Red
Red/black
17
WHITE/pink
White/red
Black
Green/blk
18
WHITE/black
Oran/blk
Figure 2.5.
NOTE
Alternative
2-6
Alternative
13
pin side view
25
pin side view
Signal
assignment
14
PIN
n°
14
• Reference item of
table 2-1: n°9
• Signal assignment:
see table 2-6
• Cable screen on the
connector cover
Interface Facility cable
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
Table 2-2 - RF coax cable LCF 1/2" CU2Y type - Technical specification
item
Mechanical
Inner conductor
Electrical data
Ø 4,8 mm AL/CU clad
Characteristic impedance
50 ±1Ω
Relative propagation velocity
88%
Dielectric
Ø 11,5 mm Foam PE
Capacity
76 pF/m
Outer conductor
Ø 13,8 mm corrugated
copper tube
Peak Power rating
23 kW
Peak RF Voltage rating
1,5 kV
Jacket
Ø 16,1 mm PE black
Attenuation @ 20°C
0,073 dB/m
Weight
Approx. 0,23 kg/m
Max operating frequency
3000 MHz
Minimum
bending radius
70 mm: single bending
DC-resistance inner conductor
1,59 Ω/km
125 mm: repeated
bending
DC-resistance outer conductor
2,0 Ω/km
Typical delay at 1000MHz
0.004 µs/m
reference plane
Ø 21,8
SW19
SW19
58
Connector N-plug for LCF 1/2" – 50 Ω
Coax cable with connector N-plug
Figure 2.6.
Vers. D, September 2005
RF coax cable - LCF 1/2"
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
2-7
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
pin solder rear view
3 wire shielded cable
GND
Connector: Cannon - CGL06PG 10SL-3S-C1L
Figure 2.7.
2.6.2
Obstruction light cable
Grounding
The ground cable must be laid separately and connected permanently to GND terminal of the "Terminal
Board) and to the connecting bolt of the cabinet.
A ground fault external interrupter it is suggested for a rated fault leakage current of 30 mA.
The copper cable, with cross-section 25 mm2, and fitted with a lug for attaching to the ground bolt, is
provided for grounding the beacon. Figures 2.10 and figure 2.12 illustrate how the beacon is grounded.
One end of the cable is inserted in the lug terminal and the other end is connected to the local ground
network, which must comply with the safety regulations stipulated in the specifications.
2.6.3
Power supply connection
The equipment can be powered from either mains, or battery, or both.
The standard version can be powered from a external 48 Vdc. The BCPS rack must be added for VAC
operation and it can either be housed inside the equipment or installed externally as well.
Cabling connections are shown in figures 2.11 and 2.12.
The BCPS unit will have a different structure depending on the type of power supply used. Furthermore,
since the beacon is not provided with any on/off breakers. It will be provided from optional breaker AC and
DC recommended with independent switch for the two power supplies.
When collocated with a System 400 (D)VOR, NDB or ILS Systems a common power supply and battery will
be implemented.
The equipment may be supplied by the mains with a 194 to 260 Vac voltage, 48 to 64 Hz, single phase, or
by an source providing a rated 48 Vdc (external source or 48Vdc battery back-up) direct power supply (40
Vdc to 60 Vdc). Equipment consumption: refer to para. 4.10.1 section 4 on this volume
Connect the mains leads (L= mains phase; N = Neutral; Mains Ground = typical green-yellow color) and
battery leads (+polarity = red cable and negative polarity = black cable) to terminals on "terminal board" as
shown in figure 2.11 or 2.13.
CAUTION
When connecting the DC supply observe the correct polarity ("+ positive" and "- negative")
2-8
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
Obstr. Light
BATTERY
48Vcc
FAN-96
ANTENNA
220Vac
mains
Automatic
battery
breaker
External electrical
switchboard
RF
M1 INPUT M2
10
Obs. Light
Automatic
mains
breaker
12
13
11
SK1
I/O Panel
see fig 2.9
Top of cabinet
14
Antenna
connector
Antenna
monitors probes
connectors
Automatic
night switch
Obstruction light
power supply
DME 400
EQUIPMENT
Ground bolt
Bottom of cabinet
Power supply Cables
Figure 2.8.
Vers. D, September 2005
To local ground network
Installation connections (typical)
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
2-9
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
UNAVAILABLE IF
MDM2 (internal modem)
IS USED
UNAVAILABLE IF
MDM1 (internal modem)
IS USED
To associated equipment 1
Identity Facility
Rear of cabinet
N.U.
Possible external
MODEM (option)
I/O PANEL
AUX. IN/OUT Parallel
signals ON/OFF
PC
OUT
IN
To telephon lines
N.U.
PL1
PORT 3 (DCE/DTE)
SK3
SK2
SK1
PORT 1 (DCE)
OUT(16/31)
OUT(0/15)
SK4
SK6
AF1
TACAN ANTENNA
SK5
PL7
PC (RS232)
To antenna
monitors
probes
PL2
PL3
PORT 2 (DTE)
IN (0/15)
PL4
IN (16/31)
PARALLEL PORT
SERIAL PORT (RS232)
AF2
ASSOC. FACILITY
1-6= LINE 1
10
3-8=LINE 2
TEL. LINES
To associated
equipment 2
Identity Facility
M1
12
M2
13
AIRING
GRIDS
To don't obstruct
TOP side area
ANTENNA
MONITORS PROBES
CONNECTORS
"N" type female
N° 4 EYE
BOLTS
11
Front of cabinet
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
"N" female type
To DME antenna
NOTE: Valid for both cabinets type
Figure 2.9.
2-10
Installation - Cables connections (typical) on top end of equipment
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
Cabinet bottom view
Front door
AIRING
GRIDS
To don't obstruct
BOTTOM side area
N° 4 holes
for fixing
to the plinth
Cabinet 297 509 007
Input power supply
cable entry
Ground bolt
Rear door
Bush fair-lead
MAINS CABLE
GROUND CABLE
GROUND CABLE
to local GND network
+ BATTERY CABLE
- BATTERY CABLE
AIRING
GRIDS
To don't obstruct
BOTTOM side area
Cabinet bottom view
Front door
N° 4 holes
for fixing
to the plinth
Cabinet 297 509 004
Input power supply
cable entry
GROUND CABLE
Ground bolt
Rear door
GROUND CABLE
to local GND network
Bush fair-lead
MAINS CABLE
+ BATTERY CABLE
- BATTERY CABLE
Figure 2.10.
Vers. D, September 2005
Installation - Cables connections (typical) on bottom of cabinet
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
2-11
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
TERMINAL BAR CONNECTIONS
to SERVICES
+ 48 Vdc input
From Battery
Battery return
(negative)
+ - + - + 10A
10A
2A
Factory wired
Factory wired
to BCPS back panel
from BCPS back panel
Figure 2.11.
+ -
I Batt. & I Nav SHUNTS
(Optional)
L - MAINS LINE
Factory wired
MAINS GND
from MAINS CABLE
Battery Depleted
Breaker
N-MAINS NEUTRAL
to TRANSP.2
*to GND
local
network
to TRANSP. 1
48 Vdc nominal
*) INSTALLATION CONNECTED WIRES
Cable connection - Grounding and AC power supply of the Terminal Bar
SAFETY PROTECTION
*Battery return
*Mains GND
*Mains Neutral
*Mains Phase
Factory wired
*+48V battery
*GND
SAFETY PROTECTION
10A
10A
WARNING
2A
+ - +- + -
+ -
Gnd
*Mains cable
N L
220 Vac
Module OK
V adj
Module OK
TP
Mains OK
V adj
TP
Mains OK
AC/DC 1
AC/DC 2
RACK BCPS
front view
Bush fair-lead
Bush fair-lead
on rear of cabinet
*) INSTALLATION
CONNECTED WIRES
* Mains cable
GND cable
to BATTERY
* BATTERY cables
* to local
GND network
NOTE: For cabinet 297 509 004 see fig. 2-10
Figure 2.12.
2-12
Cables connection - Grounding and AC power supply
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
40 to 60 Vdc
to GND
local
network
to TRANSP.2
to TRANSP. 1
Battery breaker
Not Used
to SERVICES
Battery or 48 Vdc
return (negative)
+ 48 Vdc input
From Battery or
externa power supply
Factory wired
N-MAINS
NEUTRAL
MAINS
GND
L - MAINS
LINE
+ - + - + 10A
10A
2A
I Batt. & I Nav SHUNTS
(Optional)
G N
Factory wired
Factory wired
Figure 2.13.
+ -
Grounding and external 48 Vdc power supply - Cables connection
2.6.3.1
Batteries
The battery of back up is used in case of blackout, to allow the beacon to keep working without interruption.
Batteria 12V/50A/h
Batteria 12V/50A/h
cavo positivo
cavi di
connessione
Tensione centrale
Terminali dei cavi
cavo negativo
Batteria 12V/50A/h
Figure 2.14.
Batteria 12V/50A/h
Battery connections typical
Battery type and size depend on requirements.
Suggested batteries for back-up power supply must have the following characteristics:
- Output voltage: 48 V nominal (four 12 V unit serially connected: see fig. 2.14);
- Nominal discharge capacity: 50 A/h (this capacity ensures a time duration as at para. 4.10 of section 4);
- Low maintenance types or sealed types;
- Low self-discharge;
- Long life: >4 to 5 years;
- Temperature range:
-20 to +50 °C;
- The charge from the equipment, at constant voltage, is typically: 2.25 V/element.
These required characteristics should be completed by technical information from the battery constructor.
CAUTION
The low maintenance battery group must be placed in a low-ventilated
environment, while the other sealed types, may be installed everywhere. In any
case, follow the battery constructor’s instructions.
2.6.3.1.1
Battery duration time (on 230Vac black-out)
The battery 50A/h (at end of 42V voltage), are the following:
DME415=20h - DME435=12h for TX2 stby, TX1 en service, and radiate 800 pps
DME415=18h - DME435=10h for TX2 stby, TX1 en service, and radiate 2700 pps
DME415=17h - DME435=7h pour TX2 stby, TX1 en service and radiate 4800 pps
NOTE: With battery 12 mounts old the back up period duration is typical degraded of 10/15% (see also
the technical information from the battery constructor)
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
2-13
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
2.6.4
ANTENNA CONNECTION
Mechanical antenna collocation is simple and straightforward with any type of existing VOR, DVOR or ILS
antenna.
Figure 2.15 shows the connections to be performed upon antenna installation and the identification of the
cables supplied.
Characteristics and dimensions: see para. 4.9 on section 4 of this volume (FAN 96 type dimensions are in
figure 2.15)
Antenna probe
MONITOR 1
connector
Connettore
d'ANTENNA
Obstructions light
M2
~350
M1
Antenna probe
MONITOR 2
connector
OL
90
14
12
3050
2200
View from
11
Daylight
sensor
13
300
Obstruction light
power supply
200
220
60.5 max
PL1
SK 1
SK 2
PORT 3 (DCE/ DTE )
PORT 1 (DCE)
PC (RS 232)
OUT(0/15)
PL2
PL3
PORT 2 (DTE)
SE RIA L PORT (RS232)
IN (0/15)
SK 3
OUT(16/ 31)
PL4
PA RALLEL PORT
IN (16/ 31)
SK 6
SK 4
AF2
TACAN ANTENNA
PL7
SK 5
AF1
AS SOC. FACILITY
1-6= LINE 1 3-8=LI NE 2
TEL. LI NE S
M1
M2
ANTENNA
CONNECTO R
"N" female type
11
Cabinet top view
Figure 2.15.
2-14
Cable connections to FAN 96 antenna
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
2.6.4.1
955 900 031 C
Antenna coax cables-Attenuations and delays
The interrogating signal from the aircraft received on the beacon antenna, comes the antenna connector
SK1 (equipment input/output RF) with a delay ΔtRF which depends on the antenna coax cable.
This delay, indicated in μs, is given through the following relation:
Δ t RF =
P×c
where:
L: Cable length expressed in m
P: Relative propagation velocity (for LCF 1/2" cable, typical value: 88%)
c: Light velocity (300 m/μs)
The low loss "LCF 1/2 inch" standard cable, has a delay of about 0.004 μs/m and an attenuation of about 0.073 dB/m.
The signal received in antenna comes the beacon receiver after a ΔtRF delay, is processed and, after the
reply delay (introduced by the transponder), returns to the antenna from where it is transmitted with an
additional delay ΔtRF (introduced by the antenna coax cable). If it is supposed that the beacon uses a "X"
channel mode (50 μs reply delay), the total delay of the reply signal, generated by the antenna output
system, will be:
Rvel. = ΔtRF + 50 μs + ΔtRF = 2ΔtRF+ 50 μs
The measurement of the reply delay value and its automatic compensation, in 25ns steps compared to the
fixed value, is performed by the monitors through interrogating pulses (Pilot pulse) sent by the transponder
receiver.
The calculated value of the delay and the cables loss according to their length is shown as an example in
the following table 2-3):
Table 2-3 - STD Coax cables
Parameter
Description
Monitor Cable Loss
Loss of monitor coax. cables probes
for monitoring
Antenna Cable Loss Loss of antenna coax. cable
Delay time
Delay of antenna coax. cable
Coax. cable
Type
Length
Value
LCF 1/2"
25 m
Approx. 2dB
LCF 1/2"
LCF 1/2"
25 m
25 m
Approx. 2dB
Approx. 100 ns
2.6.4.2
Data entry calibration procedure for “EXTENDED CONFIGURATION”
Figure 2.16a) shows an example of typical installation with equipped standard cables.
For calibration and check of the correctness of the power parameters measurement displayed on windows
of the “CHECK”, preset the configuration “EXTENDED CONFIGURATION” (fig. 2.16b) with the procedures
here below (also see in this volume, Appendix “D” PC user EQPT Manager on paragraphs: "Executive
Monitoring on Antenna", "STD measurements & Routine Check on Antenna" and "UTILITY – DME
Configuration").
Remark: The peak power output calibration procedure of the TX100 ad TKW modules is described on
section 5 -MAINTENANCE- para. 5.3.4 and 5.3.5 of this volume. This procedure must be carried
out during the installation, in the event of substitution of module TX100 or/and TKW and also in
case the channel change.
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
2-15
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
Obstruction lights
Transmitted Power
Monitoring Antenna 1
couplers (internal to
antenna)
Power meter
protection
attenuator
PAD
Monitor 1 probe cable
Peak Power
meter
Antenna cable
11
Monitor 2
probe cable
13
12
Peak Power Output
SK1
10 dB PAD
(only for DME 435)
Typical values (coax. cable LCF 1/2", 25 m lenght):
Monitoring Antenna couplers : 21dB ± 3dB
(for FAN96 antenna)
Monitors cables loss
: 2 dB
Antenna cable loss
: 2 dB
DME EQPT
Figure 2.16a. Simplified diagram of Antenna coax cables
Mon. 1 Power Adj.
Mon. 2 Power Adj.
Mains Power Supply
2.0
21.5
2.0
: +50
: -10
: Frako
Figure 2.16b. “EXTENDED CONFIGURATION” – Example of data entry
2-16
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
2.6.4.2.1
955 900 031 C
Check of the OUTPUT POWER measurement on transponder
a) Preset the equipment in "Maintenance" mode (TX in STBY). Unplug the antenna cable and to connect
the "peak power meter", as in fig. 2.16a, to the antenna connector. Switch to “OPERATING” mode, take
notes of the reading of the power peak meter.
b) Restore the connections of the antenna cables. With TX main in OPERATING and on window
“EXTENDED CONFIGURATION – Mon. 1 Power Adj.” Enter, if necessary, a preset value from -100,
99, -98 ...... to ..... +98,+99,+100 (Nr. 1 step by step), in order for the measurement reading on
“Executive monitoring: Peak Power Output” to be the same (±2%) as the one indicated on the external
“Peak Power Meter”, previously noted.
c) Repeat point b) for “Mon. 2 Power Adj." on window “EXTENDED CONFIGURATION
2.6.4.2.2
Measurement calibration of the TRANSMITTED POWER (radiated)
a) TX main on antenna in OPERATING. On window “EXTENDED CONFIGURATION – Monitor Cable
loss” enter the value, measured or calculated, of the monitor probe cable loss (for standard cable see
table in previous para. 2.6.4.1)
b) On “EXTENDED CONFIGURATION – Monitor Probe Coupling” enter the value of the coupler at the
operating frequency, a detail that is pointed out on the antenna features. For the model FAN 96 and
FAN 88 the coupling values of the probes are shown on a table enclosed to the package of the antenna
(for antenna FAN 96: typical value 20dB ± 3dB)
c) On “EXTENDED CONFIGURATION – Antenna cable loss” enter the value, measured or calculated, of
the antenna cable loss (for standard cable see table in previous para. 2.6.4.1)
d) The measure indicated in “Transmitted Power”, in theory, should be:
[“Peak Power Output” – Antenna cable loss] in Watt
Some significant power ratios and loss percentage are calculated as per the following table 2-4 :
Table 2-4 - Loss of STD coax cables
Ant. cable loss:
dB
-3
-2
-1,5
-1
-0,5
-0,1
Ratio
Loss
0,5
0,63
0,708
0,78
0,89
0,9772
50
37
29,2
22
11
2,28
Example: with STD cable (25m – LCF ½”) the reading in “Transmitted Power” must be:
1) for DME 415 with 110 W in Peak Power Output: 110 – (110 * 0,347) = 71,83 W
2) for DME 435 with 1050 W in Peak Power Output: 1050 – (1050 * 0,347) = 685.6 W
e) if the reading in “Transmitted Power” is over ± 2% compared to the value mentioned in point d), vary,
step by 0,1dB step , the data on window “EXTENDED CONFIGURATION – Monitor Probe Coupling”
(or in “Monitor cable loss”) up to the limit of ± 2%.
NOTE 1: The sum of the values in dB [Monitor Cable Loss + Antenna Probe Coupling + Antenna
Cable Loss] must be >20 dB and <33 dB, otherwise the data will refused.
NOTE 2: Values in “Transmitted Power” of each monitor can be adjusted within ±10%.
Difference of measure of the values in "Transmitted Power" between the two monitors due to
different attenuations of the coaxial cables, couplers and internal coax cabling, can be
corrected with the trimmer P6 mounted on module MON (shown in fig. 2.17), in order for each
monitor to read measurements that are as equivalent as possible.
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
2-17
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
f)
The power alarm thresholds of the monitors are programmed for fixed ratios, as data "SETTING" preset
and the monitors also, automatically counts the loss of the coax cables predisposed in "Extended
Configuration".
Examples are shown in table 2-5) for standard cables and with data "SETTING" of monitors power
alarm preset = -3dB:
Table 2-5 - Monitors power alarm threshold examples
EQPT
Monitors Power Alarm threshold
Peak power
output
Ant. Cable
loss
Transmitted
power
Peak Power out
Transmitt. power
DME AN 415
120 Wp
-1,85 dB
78 Wp
60 Wp
39 Wp
DME AN 435
1050 Wp
-1,85 dB
686 Wp
525 Wp
343 Wp
Measure of TRANSMITTED POWER - Calibr. adj. trimmer
Figure 2.17.
2-18
MON module – Trimmer adj. position of the “Transmitted Power” measurement
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
2.6.5
955 900 031 C
Adjustment Power Reading by monitor
Reply Delay
Reply efficiency
Pulse spacing
Peak Power Output
Transmission Rate
Transmitter Freq.
Transmitted Power
50,01 µs
98 %
12.00 µs
1062 Watt
805 ppps
1020.0 MHz
1001 Watt
50,00 µs
96 %
12.00 µs
1065 Watt
805 ppps
1020.0 MHz
1000 Watt
Reply Delay
Figure 2.18
Screen of correct measurement by Monitor 1 & 2
To adjust value of Peak Power Output (see figure 2.18) you have to change the following value of preset:
- MON1 Power Adj
- MON2 Power Adj
The range value is from –100 to +100. See figure 2.19.
Figure 2.19
Screen of configuration for power reading adjustment
To adjust value of Transmitted Power for both monitors, you have to change the values of preset. See
figure 2.19
- Monitor Cable Loss
- Antenna Probe Coupling
There is also a possibility to adjust value of power for each monitor, so you can align monitor1 with monitor2
by TRIMMER P6 on monitor board.
NOTE: Be careful !!!!
Don’t touch any other TRIMMER on monitor board
Remark: The peak power output calibration procedure of the TX100 ad TKW modules is described on
section 5 -MAINTENANCE- para. 5.3.4 and 5.3.5 of this volume.
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
2-19
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
2.6.6
I/O and external interface connections
The following I/O connectors (figure 2.15) are available on the top of the cabinet:
• PL1 - SERIAL PORT 3 (standard DTE) – 25 pin Sub D male connector
• PL2 - SERIAL PORT 2 (DTE) – 25 pin Sub D male connector
• SK1 - PC local operation (reciprocally exclusive to SK1 front panel LCSU) – 25 pin Sub D female
connector
• SK2 - PARALLEL PORT n° 16 out ON/OFF solid state relay lines – 25 pin Sub D female connector
• PL3 - PARALLEL PORT n° 16 in ON/OFF optocoupled lines – 25 pin Sub D male connector
• SK3 - N.U.
• PL4 - N.U.
• SK4 - ASSOCIATED FACILITY (AF1) interface – 25 pin Sub D female connector
• SK5 - ASSOCIATED FACILITY (AF2) interface – 25 pin Sub D female connector
• PL7 - Telephone lines PSTN or dedicated line connection -9 pin Sub D male connector
Figure 2.9 shows all the connections on I/O panel and figure 2.20 shows the connectors of I/O panel on top
end of cabinet.
Tables 2-6a) and 2-6b , (serial ports) and tables 2-7a ,b,c,d (parallel ports), list the pin-out connector
signals. On table 2-8 and table 2-9 are listed the pin-out of the connectors of the telephone line and
Associated.
Figure 2.21 shows typical examples of electrical connections related to parallel input lines, user
configurable, for the PL3 connector - PARALLEL IN - of the I/O panel.
The block a) shows the drive connection with the contact to ground of the input signal on Nr. 8 lines. The
blocks b) and c) show the possibility to drive separately, every input line of the allowable ones (eight). Every
line can be driven with a high or low level signal which configurable links (M49, M50, M51, M52) as shown in
figure 2.23 .
On table, 2-7a is shown the parallel input line used by equipment for flag indication of AC/DC power supply
Typical examples of how to use the parallel OUTPUT lines are shown in figure 2.22 where:
− in block b) a single line external connection for a configuration with a distinct common is shown;
− in block c) a four lines connection with only a user power supply (Vg) is shown;
− in block d) a four lines connection with a distinct power supply is shown;
− in block e) a solution with a power supply (5VDC), picked up from the pin 25 of SK2 connector of the
I/O panel is shown.
The commons are arranged in four lines groups, as shown in table 2-7b and in figure 2.22.
2-20
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
SK3
SK2
PL1
SK1
PORT 3 (DCE/DTE)
PORT 1 (DCE)
OUT(0/15)
OUT(16/31)
SK4
SK6
AF1
TACAN ANTENNA
SK5
PL7
PC (RS232)
PL2
PL3
PORT 2 (DTE)
IN (0/15)
PL4
PL1 = UNAVAILABLE if MDM 2 IS USED
PL2 = UNAVAILABLE if MDM 1 IS USED
ASSOC. FACILITY
SK2 = N° 16 AUXILIARY ON/OFF OUT SIGNALS (standard)
PL3 = N° 16 AUXILIARY ON/OFF IN SIGNALS (standard)
(e.g. possible Site Status Indication)
SK3 = N° 16 AUXILIARY ON/OFF OUT SIGNALS (optional)
PL4 = N° 16 AUXILIARY ON/OFF IN SIGNALS (optional)
SK1 = PC connection: UNAVAILABLE if PC
connector on FRONT PANEL is USED
SK4 = Associated Facility EQPT 1
SK5 = Associated Facility EQPT 2
Figure 2.20.
1-6= LINE 1
AF2
IN (16/31)
PARALLEL PORT
SERIAL PORT (RS232)
3-8=LINE 2
TEL. LINES
SK6 = N.U.
PL7 = N° 2 Telephon Line
Internal MODEM connected
I/O panel, top view
Table 2-6a - SK1 on I/O panel and front panel - Serial Ports PC connector pin-out signals
SIGNAL
CONNECTOR ON
CSB MODULE
SERIAL
DCE
PC CONNECTOR on I/O
PANEL
and on LCSU Front panel
M22-PIN Nr.
Port Nr.
PC-SK1- PIN Nr
(Spare)
(Spare)
14
RXD
(Spare)
15
TXD
(Spare)
CTS∼
(Spare)
RTS∼
(Spare)
10
18
(Spare)
11
(Spare)
12
19
GND
13
DCD∼
14
20
DTR∼
15
(Spare)
16
Vers. D, September 2005
NOTE
16
17
21*)
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
*) pin from 9 to 13 and 22 to 25: N.U.
2-21
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
Table 2-6b - PL1 and PL2 on I/O panel - Serial Ports MDM connector pin-out signals
SIGNAL
CONNECTOR ON
CSB MODULE
SERIAL
DTE
CONNECTOR on I/O
PANEL
M22-PIN Nr.
Port Nr.
MDM1-PL2 -PIN Nr
(Spare)
17
(Spare)
18
14
TXD1
19
TXCK1
20
15
RXD1
21
(Spare)
22
RTS∼1
23
RXCK1
24
17
CTS∼1
25
NOTE
16
(Spare)
26
18
DSR1-386
27
(Spare)
28
PGND
29
DTR∼1
30
20
DCD∼1
31
(Spare)
32
21*)
M22-PIN Nr
MDM2-PL1- PIN Nr
(Spare)
33
(Spare)
34
TXD2
35
TXCK2
36
15
RXD2
37
(Spare)
38
19
*) pin from 9 to 13 and 22 to 25: N.U.
14
16
RTS∼2
39
RXCK2
40
17
CTS∼2
41
(Spare)
42
18
DSR2-386
43
(Spare)
44
PGND
45
DTR∼2
46
20
DCD∼2
47
(Spare)
48
19
21*)
*) pin from 9 to 13 and 22 to 25: N.U.
Pin 49 to 64 on M22 (CSB) : N.A.
2-22
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
Table 2-7a - PL3 on I/O panel - INPUT Parallel Port Connector pin-out signals
SIGNAL
CONNECTOR
ON CSB
MODULE
IN Parallel line
ON/OFF
Pin function
M32-PIN Nr.
CONNECTOR
on I/O PANEL
NOTE
IN-PL3-PIN Nr
GND
PGND
VCC
+5 VDC
14
OUT3
TTL output
IAUX0
Opto-coupled input
15
b)
IAUX1
Opto-coupled input
b)
IAUX2
Opto-coupled input
16
b)
IAUX3
Opto-coupled input
b)
IAUX4
Opto-coupled input
17
b)
IAUX5
Opto-coupled input
b)
IAUX6
10
Opto-coupled input
18
b)
IAUX7
11
Opto-coupled input
b)
a) H+5 FTY1 - Indication TRX1 5Vdc faulty
IAUX8
12
Opto-coupled input
19
IAUX9
13
Opto-coupled input
a) H+5 FTY2 - Indication TRX2 5Vdc faulty
IAUX10
14
Opto-coupled input
20
a) LMNS1 - Mains input found faulty from AC/DC 1
IAUX11
15
Opto-coupled input
a) LMNS2 - Mains input found faulty from AC/DC 2
IAUX12
16
Opto-coupled input
21
a) HBDISC – Battery disconnected
IAUX13
17
Opto-coupled input
a) LMNS3 - Mains input found faulty from AC/DC 3
IAUX14
18
Opto-coupled input
22
a) HBPDPL – Battery Predepleted
IAUX15
19
Opto-coupled input
10
a) LMNS4 - Mains input found faulty from AC/DC 4
IN0
20
TTL input
23
a) HBCPFTY1 - AC/DC 1 found faulty
IN1
21
TTL input
11
a) HBCPFTY2 - AC/DC 2 found faulty
IN2
22
TTL input
24
a) HBCPFTY3 - AC/DC 3 found faulty
OUT4
23
TTL output
12
a) HBDPOFF – Non active signal
IN3
24
TTL input
25
a) HBCPFTY4 - AC/DC 4 found faulty
PGND
25
GND
13
NOTE
a) Internal use. These signals are used in the equipment for the interconnections of the BCPS unit and
cannot be used for other purposes. Definitions used are contained in the “NOTE” column.
b) Nr. 8 INPUT parallel auxiliary I/O lines, driven by a free contact ON/OFF (closing to ground) (see figure
2.21 block a).
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
2-23
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
Table 2-7b - SK2 on I/O panel - OUTPUT Parallel Port Connector pin-out signals
SIGNAL
CONNECTOR ON
CSB MODULE
OUT Parallel line ON/OFF
Pin function
M32-PIN Nr.
CONNECTOR on
I/O PANEL
NOTE
OUT-SK2-PIN Nr
Relays common for OAUX4,
OAUX5, OAUX6, OAUX7
COM3
26
COM4
27
Relays common for OAUX8,
OAUX9, OAUX10, OAUX11
14
OUT2
28
TTL output
OAUX0
29
Solid state relay output
15
c)
OAUX1
30
Solid state relay output
c)
OAUX2
31
Solid state relay output
16
c)
OAUX3
32
Solid state relay output
c)
OAUX4
33
Solid state relay output
17
c)
OAUX5
34
Solid state relay output
c)
OAUX6
35
Solid state relay output
18
c)
OAUX7
36
Solid state relay output
c)
COM1
37
Relays common for OAUX0,
OAUX1, OAUX2, OAUX3
19
OAUX8
38
Solid state relay output
c)
OAUX9
39
Solid state relay output
20
c)
OAUX10
40
Solid state relay output
c)
OAUX11
41
Solid state relay output
21
c)
OAUX12
42
Solid state relay output
c)
OAUX13
43
Solid state relay output
22
c)
OAUX14
44
Solid state relay output
10
c)
OAUX15
45
Solid state relay output
23
c)
COM2
46
Relays common for OAUX12,
OAUX13, OAUX14, OAUX15
11
OUT0
47
TTL output
24
OUT1
48
TTL output
12
VCC
49
+5 VDC
25
PGND
50
GND
13
NOTE
c) Nr. 16 OUTPUT parallel auxiliary I/O lines (for application examples: see figure 2.22).
2-24
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
Table 2-7c - PL4 on I/O panel (optional) - INPUT Parallel Port connector pin-out signals
SIGNAL
CONNECTOR ON
CSB MODULE
IN Parallel line
ON/OFF
Pin function
PIN Nr.
CONNECTOR on
I/O PANEL
IN-PL4-PIN Nr
PGND
PGND
VCC
+5 VDC
14
(Spare)
IAUX16
Opto-coupled input
15
IAUX17
Opto-coupled input
IAUX18
Opto-coupled input
16
IAUX19
Opto-coupled input
IAUX20
Opto-coupled input
17
IAUX21
Opto-coupled input
IAUX22
10
Opto-coupled input
18
IAUX23
11
Opto-coupled input
IAUX24
12
Opto-coupled input
19
IAUX25
13
Opto-coupled input
IAUX26
14
Opto-coupled input
20
IAUX27
15
Opto-coupled input
IAUX28
16
Opto-coupled input
21
IAUX29
17
Opto-coupled input
IAUX30
18
Opto-coupled input
22
IAUX31
19
Opto-coupled input
10
(Spare)
20
23
(Spare)
21
11
(Spare)
22
24
(Spare)
23
12
(Spare)
24
25
PGND
25
Vers. D, September 2005
NOTE
GND
13
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
2-25
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
Table 2-7d - SK3 on I/O panel (optional) - OUTPUT Parallel Port Connector pin-out Signals
SIGNAL
CONNECTOR ON
CSB MODULE
OUT Parallel line ON/OFF
Pin function
PIN Nr.
CONNECTOR on
I/O PANEL
OUT-SK2-PIN Nr
Relays common for OAUX4,
OAUX5, OAUX6, OAUX7
COM7
26
COM8
27
(Spare)
28
OAUX16
29
Solid state relay output
15
OAUX17
30
Solid state relay output
OAUX18
31
Solid state relay output
16
OAUX19
32
Solid state relay output
OAUX20
33
Solid state relay output
17
OAUX21
34
Solid state relay output
OAUX22
35
Solid state relay output
18
OAUX23
36
Solid state relay output
COM5
37
Relays common for OAUX0,
OAUX1, OAUX2, OAUX3
19
OAUX24
38
Solid state relay output
OAUX25
39
Solid state relay output
20
OAUX26
40
Solid state relay output
OAUX27
41
Solid state relay output
21
OAUX28
42
Solid state relay output
OAUX29
43
Solid state relay output
22
OAUX30
44
Solid state relay output
10
OAUX31
45
Solid state relay output
23
COM6
46
Relays common for OAUX12,
OAUX13, OAUX14, OAUX15
11
(Spare)
47
24
(Spare)
48
12
VCC
49
+5 VDC
25
PGND
50
GND
13
2-26
NOTE
Relays common for OAUX8,
OAUX9, OAUX10, OAUX11
14
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
Table 2-8 - PL7 on I/O Panel - Telephone line Connector pin-out signals
PIN
Signal
Tla1
TLb1
Tla2
TLb2
Line
PIN 2,4,5,9 spares
Table 2-9 - SK4 and SK5 on I/O Panel - AFI Connectors pin-out signals
Connector SK4 (AF1)
Connector SK5 (AF2)
NOTE
PIN
Signal
PIN
Signal
DIDFAFL1
DIDFAFL2
Identification from Assoc. Facility (Low)
DAF STL1
DAF STL2
Associated Facility Status (Low)
DRD AVL1
DRD AVL2
Redundancy availability (Low)
DBC OKL1
DBC OKL2
Beacon OK (Low)
DBC IAML1
DBC IAML2
N.U.
DI DTAFL1
DIDTAFL2
Identification to Assoc. Facility (Low)
DAF SELL
DAF SELL
Associated Facility Selection (Low)
(Spare)
(Spare)
(Spare)
(Spare)
10
(Spare)
10
(Spare)
11
(Spare)
11
(Spare)
12
(Spare)
12
(Spare)
13
PGND
13
PGND
14
DI DFAFH1
14
DI DFAFH2
Identification from Assoc. Facility (High)
15
DAF STH1
15
DAF STH2
Associated Facility Status (High)
16
DRD AVH1
16
DRD AVH2
Redundancy availability (High)
17
DBC OKH1
17
DBC OKH2
Beacon OK (High)
18
DBC IAMH1
18
DBC IAMH2
N.U.
19
DI DTAFH1
19
DI DTAFH2
Identification to Assoc. Facility (High)
20
DAF SELH
20
DAF SELH
Associated Facility Selection (High)
21
(Spare)
21
(Spare)
22
(Spare)
22
(Spare)
23
(Spare)
23
(Spare)
24
(Spare)
24
(Spare)
25
PGND
25
PGND
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Ground
2-27
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
2.2 kohm
+5V
INPUT Optocoupler device
Pins on connectors:
see table 2-2
User
Free Contact
IAUX0...7
GND
M32 - CSB
PL3 - I/O Panel
Pins on connectors:
see table 2-2
a) - IOAX0...7- Input Ground Signal (active low)
+5V
2.2 kohm
INPUT Optocoupler device
Pins on connectors:
see table 2-2
M49,50,51,52
Link Bridge
User
Free Contact
IAUX8...15
GND
GND
Pin on connectors:
see table 2-2
Add R for Vg > 5V
IAUX8...15
2.2 kohm
INPUT Optocoupler device
User Contact
User
Voltage
Generator
(5V)
b) - IOAX8...15- Input Ground Signal (active low)
M49,50,51,52
Link Bridge
Link Set:
see figure 2-4
M32 - CSB
PL3 - I/O Panel
2....8 mA max
Vg
GND
GND
M32 - CSB
PL3 - I/O Panel
Link Set:
see figure 2-4
c) - IOAX8...15 - Input Positive Voltage Signal
Figure 2.21.
2-28
Parallel Input Lines application
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
IC optoelectronic
switch device
DC or AC
Generator
N.U.
Ld
Ld
Vg
Vg
I max = 50 mA
Ld
Vg
COMMON
V max = 100 V
COMMON
COMMON
GND option
Common
Vg & Switch
Ron max = 50 ohm
Common
Load & Switch
Common
Vg. & Load
a) Equivalent schematic symbol
b) Single line - Application Examples
SK4 - I/O Panel
SK4 - I/O Panel
User circuit
User circuit
OAUX 0,4,8,12
OAUX 0,4,8,12
Vg
Ld
OAUX 1,5,9,13
OAUX 1,5,9,13
Vg
Ld
OAUX 2,6,10,14
OAUX 2,6,10,14
Vg
Ld
OAUX 3,7,11,15
OAUX 3,7,11,15
Vg
Ld
Common 1,3,4,2
M32 - CSB
Common 1,3,4,2
Ld
Ld
Ld
Ld
M32 - CSB
Vg
d) User load supplied
from different generators
SK4 - I/O Panel
OAUX
User Circuit
SK4 - I/O Panel
+5V
Ld
25 SK4
Common
Common
Vg
User Circuit
OAUX
Ld
GND
13 SK4
c) User Load and power supply
with same return
e) User load supplied
from +5VDC DME equipment
NOTE:
See also pin-function table 2-2. User External Load = Ld
Vg = DC or AC user Generator (or user power supply)
Figure 2.22.
Vers. D, September 2005
Parallel Output Lines application
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
2-29
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
2.6.7
Link set - Jumper presetting
The right positioning of linker on CSB module is shown in figure 2.23 with layout of PBA on fig. 2.24
The right positioning of linker on DMD module is shown in figure 2.25 with layout of PBA
The right positioning of linker on MON module is shown in figure 2.26 with layout of PBA
The right positioning of linker on TX module is shown in figure 2.27 with layout of PBA
The right positioning of linker on AFI module is shown in figure 2.28 with layout of PBA
Schematic
Reference
M1
M3
M6
Function
Link Factory Alternative
preset
link position
Battery BT1
NMI from
WATCH DOG
(WD)
NOTE
The link is open for storage or transportation purpose.
Must be closed during normal operation
The link used OFF, only for laboratory test
WDL Autoreset repeater
of WD
Allows multiple reset in case the CPU does not toggle the
watch dog input
MCS2
CHIP
SELECT
EPROM
Memory
SRAM
Memory
M19
Jumper on 3-4 = Memory supplied from VCC
Jumper on 3-4 = CHIP SEL for Memory supplied from
battery BT1
Jumper on 1-2 = 4 MBit Memory
Jumper on 1-2 = 1 MBit Memory
INT3
N.U. - Jumper on 1-2 =IAUX8 Selection
M24
Serial Data
RX
Jumper on 1-2 = Channel 4 used as RS232
M25
TX-RX
No Jumper =Allows a four wire serial RS-485
M9
VCC/VBAC
M10
M11
M12
M28
M50 (IAUX810
& IAUX11)
Jumper on 3-4 = 1 MBit Memory
Jumper on 3-4 = 4 MBit Memory
N.U. - Jumper on 3-4 = INTEXP Selection
Jumper on 3-4 = Channel 4 used as RS485
Jumper on 3-4 & 1-2 = Allows a two wire serial RS-485
Disable RS-485 CLOCK transmission
DTE/DCE
Channel 3
Serial line
switch
M49
(IAUX8 & IAUX9)
Jumper on 1-2 = CHIP SELECT for Memory supplied
from VCC
ENTXCK
M31
Jumper on 1-2 = Memory supplied from VBAC
Parallel ports
Input signals
switch for
photocoupler
12
11
10
5 4
3 2
8 9
10 11 12
Jumper on 1-12, 2-11, 3-10, 4-9, 5-8, 6-7 = DCE
configuration
12
11
10
Jumper on 1-2, 12-11, 3-4, 10-9, 5-6, 8-7 = DTE
configuration
5 4
3 2
8 9
10 11 12
Jumper on 4-9, 7-8 =Ground input signal for IAUX8,
IAUX10, IAUX12, IAUX14
Jumper on 1-12, 11-10 =Ground input signal for IAUX9,
IAUX11, IAUX13, IAUX15
M51 (IAUX12 &
IAUX13)
Jumper on 4-9, 7-8 = Positive voltage input signal for
IAUX8, IAUX10, IAUX12, IAUX14
M52 (IAUX14 &
IAUX15)
Jumper on 1-12, 11-10 = Positive voltage input signal for
IAUX9, IAUX11, IAUX13, IAUX15
Figure 2.23 .
List of Links Set on CSB Module
Jumper: default position
M9, M11, M12, M24: link 1-2
M10, M19: link 3-4
M49, M50, M51, M52: link 7-8, 4-9, 10-11, 1-12
M3, M6, M28: link ON
M25: open
M31: link 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7- 8, 9-10, 11-12
M1= Normal operation: link ON. Open during transport and storage only
2-30
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
RX Indication
green LED
TX Indication
green LED
3 1
M12
M51
M21
4 2
M22
M52
M3
M53
M50
M49
3 1
12
1 12
M31
M24
4 2
3 1
6 7
M19
M32
4 2
I1
2 4
3 1
1 3
4 2
M9
M30
M1
I2
M28
3 1
M11
M10
4 2
Reset
Push button
Dip Switch (N.U.)
Figure 2.24.
3 1
M6
M18
M25
4 2
RD4
Watch dog
red LED
Links Setting on CSB Module
The jumpers topographic position on PBA DMD module is shown in figure 2.25
The jumpers topographic position on PBA MON module is shown in figure 2.26
The jumpers topographic position on PBA TX100 module is shown in figure 2.27
The jumpers topographic position on PBA AFI module is shown in figure 2.28
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
2-31
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
M8 - NORMAL OPEN
ON=Monitor command:
forces TX in STBY
I1-CPU Reset Pushbutton
CM1-Pushbutton that forces
the TRX on Antenna
M12
M7
M13
I1
I1
M9-Normal OPEN
(N.U.)
M7,M12,M13 - NORMAL OPEN
ON=Possible serial line
M6 - Watch-dog
enabled: jumper CLOSED (NORMAL)
disable: jumper open
CM1
M6
M9
M8
Figure 2.25.
2-32
Links Setting on DMD Module
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
M8 - Watch-dog
enabled: jumper CLOSE (NORMAL)
disable: jumper open
I1 - CPU Reset
Pushbutton
M6 - OFF=NORMAL
ON=Change of RAM
Memory Size
I1
M6
M8
Figure 2.26.
Vers. D, September 2005
Links Setting on MON Module
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
2-33
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
M8
M6
M6 Jumper: OFF=TX 100 W
ON= TKW 1kW
M8 Jumper: ON=TX 100 W
OFF= TKW 1kW
Figure 2.27.
2-34
Links Setting on TX Module
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
2.6.8
955 900 031 C
Associated Facility Interface
Electrical interfacing, i.e. identity association can be easily performed as well, by means of a highly flexible
interface board (AFI), inside the DME cabinet.
The DME ground beacon can be associated to VHF equipment such as a VOR or ILS. In this case, the
beacon must be equipped with the appropriate AFI interface module.
The DME can operate either as master or as slave in the association (software configurable), according to
the VOR or ILS capability and to system requirements.
A cable with a single connector fitted is supplied for this connection. This connector must be connected to
connector SK4 or SK5 (called AF1 or AF 2 ASSOCIATED FACILITY) on the I/O panel of the equipment (on
top of the cabinet). The other end of the cable must be connected to the associated VHF equipment.
AF1 or AF2 are selected by means of an external switch (e.g. by Control tower room): see applications in
figure 2.29. In default condition, is enabling the AF1 connector.
The connection to associated equipment of the identity and beacon status signals input and output, is
shown in the figure 2.29 (application) and the block diagram is shown in figure 1.30 (section 1 - General
information).
The lists of the pin signals on connectors SK4 and SK5, on top end I/O panel, are in Tables 2-9 and 2-10.
It is possible change the current source (source external or source internal) rotating 180 degree the 8 pin
DIL header plug, shown in figure 2.28, of the module AFI layout for a correct positioning of the links
Figure 2.30 gives a few association examples with equipment associated.
Table 2-10 - AFI Connectors pin-out signals
Acronyms
Definition
SK4 pin
SK5 pin
AFI PBA - M1 pin
AF SEL
Input-Associated Facility selection
20
20
18c
18a
ID FAF 1
Input- Identification from Associated Facility
14
3a
4a
AF ST 1
Input- Associated Facility Status
15
5a
6a
ID FAF 2
Input- Identification from Associated Facility
14
3c
4c
AF ST 2
Input- Associated Facility Status
15
5c
6c
ID FTF 1
Output - Identification to Associated Facility
19
16a 17a
BC OK 1
Output- Beacon OK
17
12a 13a
RD AV 1 (*)
Output- Redundancy Available
16
7a
BC IAM 1(*)
Output- Beacon IA Mode degraded
18
14a 15a
ID TAF 2
Output - Identification to Associated Facility
19
16c
17c
BC OK 2
Output- Beacon OK
17
12c
13c
RD AV 2 (*)
Output- Redundancy Available
16
7c
8c
BC IAM 2 (*)
Output- Beacon IA Mode degraded
18
14c
15c
ID FAF
To transponder - Identification
AF ST
To transponder - Status
22c
ID TAF
From transponder - Identification
25a
BC OK
From transponder – Beacon OK
24a
8a
22a
NOTE 1: (*) N.U. on DME/N
NOTE 2: SK4 used for Associated equipment AF1 (standard default).
SK5 used for Associated equipment 2. It is used also on possible emergency conditions (e.g. failure
on AF1 section), if equipment 2 is not available (in this case, the pin 7 and 20 of "AF SEL" signal will
be short-circuited).
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
2-35
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
R25
R24
R39
R35
R42
R41
R34
UL1
OP1
R11
RD17
R17 R22
R16
TR8
TR9
TR3
TR4
R26
OP3
L1
R2
R1
C7
R23 R13
R43
TR5
UL2
RD19
M2
AF1
RD5
RD4
RD13
BC OK
RD AV
AF ST
RD1
AF SEL
M7
M2
M4
M3
RD12
ID FAF
RD6
C6
R38
M6
RD3
M8
R7
M13
M14
M12
BC IAM
R6
M10
M11
ID TAF
M1
AF2
R5
M9
RD18
RD2
R37
R8
R20
R36
C1
C3
M5
RD11
OP4
R4
R3
R12
R21
TR10
R18
R27
OP2
TR1
TR2
RD10
R32
RD9
RD8
L2
RD7
UL3
TR6
TR7
R10
OP7
OP7
R15 R9
R14 R19
C4
OP6
R33 R31
R30 R29
C5
HEADER PLUG
(8 pin DIL)
Internal current source
(default)
External current source
Header plug rotate of 180°
PBA SOCKET
Figure 2.28.
2-36
C2
OP5
R28
R40
RD14
RD16
RD15
INPUT Signals (H&L):
ID FAF=Identity from Associated Facility equipment
AF ST= Associated Facility equipment Status
AF SEL= Associated Facility equipment Selection
OUTPUT Signals (H&L):
ID TAF=Identity to Associated Facility equipment
BC OK= Beacon OK
RD AV=Redundance Availability (N.U.)
BC IAM=Beacon degraded IAM (N.U.)
Header plugs setting on AFI Module
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
SK4/AF1
SK5/AF2
USER Switch examples
HEADER
position
13V/5mA max
SOCKET
AFI PBA
Optocoupler
5mA
Limiter
+15V
INPUT Signals (H&L):
INTERNAL current source
(default)
Cabinet
Top End
SK4/AF1
SK5/AF2
AFI PBA
HEADER
position
USER Switch examples
40V max/5V min/5mA
SOCKET
ID FAF=Identity from
Associated equip.
AF ST= Associated
equipment Status
AF SEL= Associated
equipment Selection
Optocoupler
5mA
Limiter
+15V
EXTERNAL current source
Cabinet
Top End
SK4/AF1
SK5/AF2
AFI PBA
HEADER
position
USER Load examples
13V/10mA max
RL
Optocoupler
SOCKET
RL
OUTPUT Signals (H&L):
+15V
INTERNAL current source
(default)
Cabinet
Top End
SK4/AF1
SK5/AF2
AFI PBA
HEADER
position
40V max/5V min/10mAmax
ID TAF=Identity to
Associated equipment
BC OK= Beacon OK
RD AV=Redundance
Availability
(N.U.on DME/N)
BC IAM=Beacon degraded
in IAM
(N.U. on DME/N)
Optocoupler
SOCKET
USER RL
Load
+15V
Cabinet
Top End
EXTERNAL current source
NOTE: Pin-out on SK4/SK5 according to tables 2-6 & 2-7 and to AFI module layout fig. 2.23
AF1 = Associated Facility equipment 1 (default)
AF2 = Possible Associated Facility equipment 2
INPUT signal "AF SEL": with user switch OFF (open)
the only AF1 (EQPMT 1) is enabled;
with user switch ON, the only AF2
(EQPMT 2) is enabled
Figure 2.29.
Vers. D, September 2005
AFI Module - Input and output signals application
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
2-37
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
CSL module P/ N
DME OK
83134_23101
37 PIN
Connector
DME FTY
DBC_OKH
17
X2 5
DMSD1
V 98
DMSD2
DBC_OKL
18
DME_STATUS
X1 5
X7
X8
DI DFAFH
34
V7 7
V7 5
V9 7
I D CODE DME
DI DFAFL
16
X 11
X5
DAF_STH
X6
35
VOR OP
V7 8
VOR KO
36
V7 6
V96
DAF_STL
X12
Associated Equipment
AFI - CSL module 8 3 1 3 4 _ 2 3 1 0 1
ASSOCIATION
17
+15V
S K 4 ( A F 1)
S K 5 ( AF 2)
AF I
1K
M5/11
SOCKET
DBC_OK
HEADER
Association specification
+15 V
- DME: "slave code/synch"
- DME: Receive from AF the signals:
a) I DFAF (Identity from Associated Facility)
b) AF-ST (Associated Facility Statu)
- DME Send to AF the signal:
a) BC-OK (Beacon OK)
14
DI DFAF
M2/14
SOCKET
5 mA
HEADER
+15V
15
DAF_ST
M3 / 1 3
SOCKET
5 mA
HEADER
+15V
ATC TOWER
control room
20
SK5 ENABLED (AF 2)
SK4 DISABLED (AF 1)
LAF1SEL
M8
SOCKET
5 mA
SK4 ENABLED (AF 1)
SK5 DISABLED (AF 2)
HEADER
AF SELECTOR Switch
HEADER set for:
"INTERNAL current source"
DME
Figure 2.29a. AFI Module – Association example with VOR/ILS 400
2-38
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
NORMARC
Connection Interface PBA
CI 1 2 1 0 A
P8
ACT_DMEP
ACT_DMEN
DBC_OKH
DBC_OKL
S1
S2
S3
OUT_DMEP
S7
S8
AF I -
OUT_DMEN
DIDFAFH
DIDFAFL
CI 1 2 1 0 A NORMARC
ASSOCIAT I ON
S K 4 ( AF 1)
S K 5 ( AF 2)
Association specification
17
- DME: "slave code/synch"
- DME: Receive from AF the signals:
a) I DFAF (Identity from Associated Facility)
b) AF-ST (Associated Facility Statu)
- DME Send to AF the signal:
a) BC-OK (Beacon OK)
+15V
1K
AF I
M5/11
SOCKET
DBC_OK
HEADER
(2)
+15 V
14
DI DFAF
M2/14
SOCKET
5 mA
HEADER
(1)
+1 5V
DAF_STH
15
DAF_STL
DAF_ST
M3 / 1 3
SOCKET
5 mA
HEADER
(1)
+1 5V
ATC TOWER
control room
20
LAF1SEL
M8
SK5 ENABLED (AF 2)
SK4 DISABLED (AF 1)
SK4 ENABLED (AF 1)
SK5 DISABLED (AF 2)
SOCKET
5 mA
HEADER
AF SELECTOR Switch
(1)
HEADER set for:
(1) "INTERNAL current source"
(2)"EXTERNAL current source"
DME
Figure 2.29b. AFI Module – Association example with VOR/ILS NORMAC
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
2-39
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
Shelter
interface facility cable
DME-INTERFACE
Shelter
AF1/SK4
External connection
Identity cable
ILS-GS
cable
DME
ILS-LOC
DME - LOC Identity Connection cable
interface facility cable
Shelter
AF1/SK4
VOR or DVOR
DME
DME - VOR Identity Connection cable
Control Tower Room
Switch selector
External connection
Identity cable
Shelter
equip. 2
interface facility cables
DME-INTERFACE
cable
AF2/SK5
DME-INTERFACE
cable
AF1/SK4
Shelter
equip. 1
Shelter
ILS-LOC
ILS-GS
DME
External connection
Identity cable
ILS-LOC
DME Identity Connection cable with two LOC equipments
Figure 2.30.
2-40
Equipment associated examples
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
2.6.9
955 900 031 C
Remote Control and Status Indicator
Typical examples of connections to remote control and repeater Main Status Indication are shows in figure
2.31. Information concerning the installation of the Remote Control is given on "RCSI or RCSE or MCS
Technical Manuals ".
E N V IR O N M E N T P ro b e s A L A R M S
(S M O K E , T E M P ., IN T R U S IO N ,
O b s tr u ctio n lig h t...)
REMOTE CONTROL
EQUIPMEN T
M A IN ST ATUS
ESD: teleph. line protection
Parallel port
R CSI
RC SI 446
DE TA ILE D S TAT US
C OM M A ND
PL3 OAUX
Input ON/OFF
parallel lines
RCSI 446-2
PL7 Telephon lines
or
SK1-PC
RCSE 443
EQUI PMEN T
MA4 IN ST AT
US
RC
DET AI LED ST AT US
MON 1
MON 2
AER IAL
AER IAL
ALAR M
WAR NING
NO RM AL
ALAR M
WAR NING
ALAR M
WAR NI NG
ALAR M
WAR NI NG
ALAR M
WAR NING
NO RM AL
NO RM AL
NO RM AL
NO RMAL
DA TA COM
DA TA COM
DA TA COM
DA TA COM
STAN DBY
ALAR M
WAR NING
ALAR M
WAR NING
STAN DBY
TX 1
NO RM AL
NO RM AL
DA TA COM
DA TA COM
FAULTY
FAULTY
BYPA SSED
BYPA SSED
ON
WAR NING
WARNING
DA TA COM
FAULTY
FAULT Y
ON ANT
ON ANT
ENG AG ED
M AINTEN
M AINTEN
M AINTEN
M AINTEN
SEL ECT
SEL ECT
SEL ECT
M AINTEN
M AI NTEN
M AINTEN
OP ERATION
TX 2
ON
WAR NING
ALAR M
WAR NI NG
NO RM AL
DA TA COM
CONTROL
DA TA COM
STATION
M AINS OFF
SIL
M AI NTEN
ENV A LRM
ENA BLED
COMMAND
AN T FTY
SEL ECT
SEL ECT
SEL ECT
SEL ECT
SEL ECT
EQUI P
ON/OFF
CHANGE
OVER
REQUEST
RELEASE
OTHER WARN
LAMP
TEST
Monitoring and Control Systems
MCS Program on PC (option)
DME 415/435
RS 232
Switched or dedicated
teleph. LINE
To possible VHF
or other type of equipment
(P C )
EQUIPMENT ROOM
E N V IR O N M E N T P ro b e s A L A R M S
(S M O K E , T E M P ., IN T R U S IO N ,
O b s tr u ctio n lig h t...)
Interface connected
directly on PL2 connector
Parallel port
PL3 OAUX
Input ON/OFF
parallel port
RS 232
PL2 serial port
Asyncronous
Converter
Interface
STATUS INDICATOR
SI 446 - 2
SI
EQUI PME NT S TAT US
ON
RS 422 (max 1km)
SK1-PC
PL7 Telephon lines
ALARM
ALARM
WARNING
WARNING
NORM AL
NORM AL
LAM P
SIL
TEST
CONTROL ROOM
Monitoring and Control Systems
MCS Program on PC (option)
RS 232
DME 415/435
Switched or dedicated
telephon LINE
(P C )
REMOTE CONTROL
EQUIPMENT ROOM
Figure 2.31.
Vers. D, September 2005
Remote Control and Status Indications connection examples
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
2-41
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
2.6.10
PC Installation
For local mode the cable is connected to the RS-232 terminal on the front panel of the local control and
status unit (LCSU) or on SK1 connector of the I/O panel of the cabinet
In the case of remote mode, the data transfer is achieved via the modem and the remote control unit (e.g.
RCSI 446/RCSE443, see figure 2.32).
NOTE:
The procedures of program installation on PC are described in section 3 of this volume, paragraph 3.5 - and
para 3.6.
The program installation is described in Appendix sections of this volume:
− APPENDIX B-PC user WINDOWS SUPERVISOR;
− APPENDIX C-PC user WINDOWS ADRACS SUPERVISOR;
− APPENDIX D-PC user EQUIPMENT MANAGER.
RS-232
PC "Remote" (see *NOTE)
see *NOTE
MODEM
Internal
or External
MODEM
(e.g.COM1)
Printer
DME
PC "LOCALE"
(laptop or
desktop type)
Switched or dedicated
teleph. LINE
Mouse
PC
RS-232
EQU IP MEN T
M AIN
S TA5 TU S
RC
D ET AI L ED ST ATU S
MO N 1
MO N 2
AERIAL
AERIAL
Stampante
STANDBY
AL ARM
MODEM
W ARNING
ALARM
WARNING
ALARM
WARNING
ALARM
WARNING
AL ARM
W ARNING
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
DATACO M
DAT ACO M
DAT ACO M
DATACO M
DATACO M
AL ARM
WARNING
ALARM
WARNING
STANDBY
TX 1
NORMAL
NORMAL
DAT ACO M
DAT ACO M
F AULTY
FAULTY
BYPASSED
BYPASSED
ON
WA RN ING
FAULTY
FA ULT Y
ON ANT
O N A NT
MAINTEN
MAINTEN
CO N TRO L
ENGAGED
MAINT EN
MAINT EN
MAINTEN
MAINTEN
MAINTEN
MAINT EN
TX 2
ON
WARNING
ALARM
OPERAT O
IN
WARNING
DATACO M
Mouse
WARNING
NORMAL
DATACO M
STA TIO N
MAINS OFF
SIL
ENABL ED
ENVAL RM
CO M M AN D
ANT FT Y
Internal
or External
NOTE:
With Monitoring and Control Systems ( RCSI/RCSE not used)
is necessary to install on PC the MCS software
Figure 2.32.
2-42
SE L ECT
SE LECT
SE LECT
SE LECT
SE L ECT
SE L ECT
SE LECT
SE L ECT
EQ UIP
O N/O F F
CH AN G E
O VER
RE QU EST
RE LEA SE
O T HE R WA R N
L A MP
TES T
Printer
REMOTE CONTROL
(RCSI or RCSE)
PC connection examples
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
2.6.11
955 900 031 C
Power supply with BCPS subrack of Frako type (optional version)
The grounding and supply connections are similar to like described in para 2.6.2 and 2.6.3. For this optional
version to refer at figures 2.33 and also at para 1.6.8.2.1 section 1 in this volume.
+48 Coax.
Relay
Battery input TERMINALS and
+48V 1
+48V 2
Input external 48Vdc power supply
+B
+B
GND
-B
-R
+A
-A
+D
-D
+R
+A
-A
+D
-D
+R -R
-B
+N
-N
+N
-N
20A
ST11
20A
2A
2A
+BAT
L1
L2
L3 FPE
PE
-BAT
BATTERY cables
Battery, or esternal
48Vdc, cable
Bush fair-lead
Figure 2.33.
2.6.11.1
To internal cabinet bolt
of the local ground network
Mains cable
Mains cable
Bush fair-lead
BCPS subrack of Frako type - Supply cables connection
External power supply 48Vdc connection (Frako subrack)
BCPS unit is equipped with the Supervisor module and without the AC/DC converters.
Connect cables 3 and 4 of table 2-1, to "± B" terminals (Fig. 2.33). Cable “2” is not used.
Configure the LCSU as described in Section 3 para. 3.2.2.1.2.3 (Aux Input 8..15), disabling the warning
messages for: MAINS/BATT, AC/DC FAULTY, PREDEPL.
NOTE: fuses F1-F2 of the printed circuit board, inside the Battery Supervisor module, must be removed.
WARNING
During power supply connection: be sure the breaker of the Battery
Supervisor is OFF.
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
2-43
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 2 - Installation
955 900 031 C
Page Intentionally Blank
2-44
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
Description, Installation, Operation, Maintenance
Reference: Vol. 1 Code 955 900 031 C
GROUND BEACON
DME 415/435
Technical Manual
VOLUME 1
Equipment description, Installation, Operation, Maintenance and PC user
SECTION 3
OPERATION and USE INSTRUCTION
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- Air Systems Division
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
3-II
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 -Operation & Use
Ref. 955 900 031 C
Table of CONTENTS
Paragraph
Page
SECTION 3............................................................................................................................................3-1
OPERATION and USE INSTRUCTION ...................................................................................3-1
GENERAL .............................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1
LOCAL CONTROL and INDICATION PANEL .........................................................................3-1
3.2
LCSU unit Configuration Procedure .........................................................................................3-6
3.2.1
LCSU PARAMETER CONFIGURATION..........................................................................3-6
3.2.1.1
Program install on PC .......................................................................................................3-6
3.2.1.1.1
From floppy disk................................................................................................................3-6
3.2.1.1.2
From CDROM ...................................................................................................................3-6
3.2.2
LCSU CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE .........................................................................3-7
3.2.2.1
Main Menu ........................................................................................................................3-7
3.2.2.2
System Overview ..............................................................................................................3-8
3.2.2.3
LCSU Configuration ..........................................................................................................3-9
3.2.2.3.1
LCSU Site Code................................................................................................................3-9
3.2.2.3.2
User Configuration ............................................................................................................3-10
3.2.2.3.3
Parallel Input Definition .....................................................................................................3-13
3.2.2.3.4
Parallel Output Definition ..................................................................................................3-18
3.2.2.3.5
Commands equipments list .............................................................................................3-24
3.2.2.3.6
User Connection Parameters ...........................................................................................3-25
3.2.2.3.7
LCSU Site Equipment Configuration ................................................................................3-26
3.2.2.3.8
LCSU Site Parameter .......................................................................................................3-27
3.2.2.3.9
REU parameters ...............................................................................................................3-27
3.2.2.3.10 Export Configuration Data ................................................................................................3-28
3.2.2.3.11 Import Configuration Data.................................................................................................3-28
3.2.2.3.12 Hardware Test ..................................................................................................................3-28
3.2.2.3.13 Test of Parallel Input Port .................................................................................................3-29
3.2.2.3.14 Test of Parallel Output Port ..............................................................................................3-30
3.2.2.3.15 Test of Serial Lines ...........................................................................................................3-32
3.2.2.4
Test Data Consistency......................................................................................................3-33
3.2.2.5
To Exit from the Program..................................................................................................3-33
3.2.2.6
Modem Configuration........................................................................................................3-34
3.2.3
File Configuration in Supervisory Program .......................................................................3-35
3.3
INDICATORS ON THE MODULES ..........................................................................................3-36
3.4
I/O FUNCTIONING...................................................................................................................3-39
3.5
USER SOFTWARE INSTALLATION on PC ............................................................................3-39
3.5.1
General .............................................................................................................................3-39
3.5.2
PC user programs INSTALLATION ..................................................................................3-40
3.5.2.1
PC REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................................3-41
3.6
INSTALLATION on PC OF USER OPERATING PROGRAM..................................................3-41
3.6.1
"PC Supervisor" program composition .............................................................................3-42
3.6.1.1
Windows SuperVisor (WINSV) .........................................................................................3-42
3.6.1.2
WinSv ADRACS Windows Supervisor..............................................................................3-42
3.6.1.3
Windows DME/N Equipment Manager - WINDME/N-32 ..................................................3-42
3.6.1.4
MCS programming............................................................................................................3-42
3.7
First SWITCHING ON...............................................................................................................3-43
3.8
POWER OFF PROCEDURE....................................................................................................3-44
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
3-a
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
List of FIGURES
Figure
Page
Figure 3.1. LCSU Front panel............................................................................................................... 3-1
Figure 3.2. Main Menu .......................................................................................................................... 3-7
Figure 3.3. System Overview................................................................................................................ 3-8
Figure 3.4. Configuration menu ............................................................................................................ 3-9
Figure 3.5. Site Code ............................................................................................................................ 3-9
Figure 3.6. Users Configuration............................................................................................................ 3-10
Figure 3.7. Users Configuration Table example ................................................................................... 3-13
Figure 3.8. Parallel Input Definition....................................................................................................... 3-13
Figure 3.9. Parallel Input....................................................................................................................... 3-14
Figure 3.10. Input command Logic ....................................................................................................... 3-14
Figure 3.11. Example of Beacon Site Environment............................................................................. 3-15
Figure 3.12.a. Aux input 8...15 - Configuration Examples .................................................................... 3-15
Figure 3.12.b. Additional input 0.. 3 - Configuration Examples ............................................................ 3-16
Figure 3.13. Parallel Output Definition.................................................................................................. 3-18
Figure 3.14. Output command Logic .................................................................................................... 3-19
Figure 3.15.a. Parallel Output Definition - OUT 0................................................................................. 3-19
Figure 3.15.b. Parallel Output Definition - OUT 1................................................................................. 3-19
Figure 3.15.c. Parallel Output Definition - OUT 2 ................................................................................. 3-20
Figure 3.15.d. Parallel Output Definition - OUT 3................................................................................. 3-20
Figure 3.15.e. Parallel Output Definition - AUX OUTPUT O..7 ........................................................... 3-20
Figure 3.16. Parallel Output Definition - Buzzer ................................................................................... 3-21
Figure 3.17. User Connection Parameters ........................................................................................... 3-25
Figure 3.18. LCSU Site equipment menu ............................................................................................. 3-26
Figure 3.19. Status of LCSU Site equipment........................................................................................ 3-26
Figure 3.20. LCSU Site parameter ....................................................................................................... 3-27
Figure 3.21. Reu Parameters ............................................................................................................... 3-27
Figure 3.22. Export LCSU configuration data....................................................................................... 3-28
Figure 3.23. Import LCSU configuration data ....................................................................................... 3-28
Figure 3.24. Hardware Test .................................................................................................................. 3-28
Figure 3.25. Test of Parallel Input Port ................................................................................................. 3-29
Figure 3.26. Test Control Input ............................................................................................................. 3-29
Figure 3.27. Test Aux Input .................................................................................................................. 3-30
Figure 3.28. Test Additional Input......................................................................................................... 3-30
Figure 3.29. Test of Parallel Output Port .............................................................................................. 3-30
Figure 3.30. Test Output port 1............................................................................................................. 3-31
Figure 3.31. Test Aux Output................................................................................................................ 3-31
Figure 3.32. Test Buzzer....................................................................................................................... 3-32
Figure 3.33. Test of Serial Lines........................................................................................................... 3-32
Figure 3.34. Testing of Port Number .................................................................................................... 3-32
Figure 3.35. Test Data Consistency ..................................................................................................... 3-33
Figure 3.36. System control via PC (example) .................................................................................... 3-35
Figure 3.37. LED indicators on transponder modules .......................................................................... 3-37
Figure 3.38. LED indicators on 1 kWp RF amplifiers and AFI modules ............................................... 3-38
Figure 3.39. LED indicator on AC/DC power supply module and on the MODEM .............................. 3-38
Figure 3.40. Examples of PC user programs with DME stand alone ................................................... 3-40
Figure 3.41. Examples of PC user programs in VOR-DME system ..................................................... 3-40
Figure 3.42. Examples of PC user programs with multi-sites............................................................... 3-41
3-b
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 -Operation & Use
Ref. 955 900 031 C
List of TABLES
Table
Page
Table 3-1. Controls and Indications on the Front panel of LCSU (Main Status)...................................3-2
Table 3-2. Controls and Indications on the Front panel (Detailed status).............................................3-3
Table 3-3. Controls and Indications on the Front panel (Control, Commands, Station) .......................3-4
Table 3-4. Controls and Indications on the Front panel (LCSU status) ................................................3-5
Table 3-5. List of the input Identifier ......................................................................................................3-17
Table 3-6. List of the Detailed Status Indications..................................................................................3-22
Table 3-7. List of Equipment Status ......................................................................................................3-23
Table 3-8. List of the Indications from LCSU to User............................................................................3-24
Table 3-9. Equipment Commands list ...................................................................................................3-24
Table 3-10. LEDs Indicators on the Front of every modules.................................................................3-36
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
3-c
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
Page Intentionally Blank
3-d
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
SECTION 3
OPERATION and USE INSTRUCTION
GENERAL
For local operation, only a few functions are operable with the Control and Indication Panel (LCSU). The
configuration, alignment procedure and the maintenance are performed with a locally connected PC via a
user program "WINSV Supervisor" installed on a PC (typical connections example in section 1 on Vol.1 of
this technical manual).
In the normal case standard of remote operation, is carried out via a control interface, connected at a
Remote Control and Status Indicator unit (typical connections example in section 1 on Vol.1 of this technical
manual).
3.1
LOCAL CONTROL AND INDICATION PANEL
The local controls and indicators are to be found on the front panel of INC Module of the LCSU unit only,
located at the front door.
The Control and Indication Panel is subdivided into the following fields:
•
•
•
•
•
•
MAIN STATUS
DETAILED STATUS
COMMAND
CONTROL
STATION
LCSU
The individual fields contain indications and keys. Only those indications currently in message status are lit
up and thus legible. This ensures that misinterpretations are avoided. The meaning of the indications and
keys in the various fields are described in the following paragraphs.
These controls and indicators are listed in tables 3-1 and shown in figure 3.1.
MAIN
STATUS
LCSU
DETAILED STATUS
MON 1
MON 2
TX 1
TX 2
ON
ON
OPERATION
RD16
ALARM
ALARM
RD26
PC
RS232
RD1
ALARM
RD31
WARNING
RD30
RD27
STBYALRM
STBYALRM
WARNING
FAULTY
FAULTY
FAULTY
RD28
RD21
BYPASSED
RD12
RD22
RD23
BYPASSED
RD13
NORMAL
RD29
DATA COM
SELECT
RD24
RD18
ON ANT
RD33
COMMAND
CHANGE
ON/OFF
OVER
I1
I2
I3
DATA COM
FAULTY
RD4
RD19
ON ANT
S1
RD9
MAINS OFF
ENABLED
ENV ALRM
RD5
SIL
I6
RD20
ANT FTY
I4
RD7
RD14
ENGAGED
REQUEST
RELEASE
WARNING
WARNING
STATION
RD10
EQUIP
RD17
CONTROL
RD15
RD32
RD11
RD25
RD8
OTHER WARN
RD6
LAMP
TEST
I5
LOCAL CONTROL & STATUS UNIT
Figure 3.1. LCSU Front panel
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
3-1
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
Table 3-1. Controls and Indications on the Front panel of LCSU (Main Status)
Definition
Color
of indicator
Reference
to Fig. 3.1
MAIN STATUS field
DESCRIPTION
Field with display always active
PC RS232
connector
(SK6)
Display
RD1
ALARM
Red
RD31
Serial RS 232 connector that permits insertion of the cable of the
serial line to interconnect a local PC. This connector is “pin to pin”
parallel of SK1 located on the I/O Panel at top end of equipment.
Text display: N° 4 programmable digit alphanumeric, electronic dataplate
that makes it possible to highlight the equipment code or identification of the
site. These indicators are managed and stored with the configuration
program.
Normally OFF.
In AUTOMATIC mode, indicates shut-down of the beacon.
In MANUAL mode, the led is always ON because the radiated signal not is
longer guaranteed.
WARNING
Yellow
RD30
Normally OFF.
ON: Indicates that the beacon is affected by:
- a secondary alarm of the transponder on antenna;
- a faulty DMD or DPR irregular functioning of these;
- a faulty monitor;
- alarm on the transponder in ST-BY;
- mains failure;
- beacon OFF;
- other general faults.
NORMAL
Green
RD29
Normally ON.
No ALARMS or WARNINGS have been found.
DATA COM
Red
RD32
Normally OFF.
Indication of errors or faults in the serial communication system between
equipment and LCSU.
Green
RD11
Acknowledgement for SELECT key - Triangular shaped that indicates
selection of enabling to highlight detailed states by the local operator.
SELECT
key
I1
3-2
Selection key to disable and enable detailed status indications.
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
Table 3-2. Controls and Indications on the Front panel (Detailed status)
Definition
Color
of indicator
Reference
to Fig. 3.1
DETAILED STATUS field
MON 1
DESCRIPTION
This field must be enabled by the operator using the “SELECT” key
Red
RD26
STBY
ALARM
Yellow
RD28
MON 1
Yellow
RD21
Yellow
RD12
This indicator is ON when the operator sets the beacon to MANUAL mode.
In this case, the intervention functions by Monitor 1 are ignored. It switches
on, together with MON2 BYPASS (RD13).
Red
RD27
Normally OFF.
Indicates that Monitor 2 has found parameters of the transponder on
antenna out of tolerance.
Yellow
RD22
Normally OFF.
Indicates that Monitor 2 has found an error or defect in the transponder on
the dummy load.
Yellow
RD23
Normally OFF.
Indicates a fault due to Monitor 2 or that Monitor 2 has not passed the tests
of its own self-check correctly.
Yellow
RD13
This indicator is ON when the operator sets the beacon to MANUAL mode.
In this case, the execution functions by Monitor 1 are avoided. It switches
on, together with MON1 BYPASS (RD12).
ON
Green
RD25
Normally ON.
Transmitter 1 has received the ON OPERATING command and is operating
correctly, providing power either on antenna or on dummy load.
TX 1
Yellow
RD24
Red
RD18
ALARM
MON 1
FAULTY
MON 1
BYPASSED
MON 2
ALARM
MON 2
STBY
ALARM
MON 2
FAULTY
MON 2
BYPASSED
TX 1
WARNING
TX 1
FAULTY
Normally OFF.
Indicates that Monitor 1 has found one or more of the parameters of the
transponder, on antenna, out of tolerance.
Normally OFF.
Indicates that Monitor 1 has found an error or defect in the transponder on
the dummy load.
Normally OFF.
Indicates a fault due to Monitor 1 or that Monitor 1 has not passed the tests
of its own self-check correctly.
Normally OFF.
Indicates faults or secondary alarms (one or more) found on transponder 1.
Normally OFF.
Indicates a primary alarm on transponder 1. TRX 1 is shut down by
monitor system due to an alarm
TX 1
Green
RD33
Indication that makes it possible to check whether the transponder is on
antenna. In this case, it indicates transponder 1 on antenna: therefore,
transponder 2 is connected to the dummy load.
Green
RD17
Normally ON. - Transmitter 2 has received the OPERATING command and
is operating correctly providing power either on antenna or on dummy load.
In single configuration, it is always in OFF
Yellow
RD14
Normally OFF. - Indicates faults or secondary alarms (one or more) found
on transponder 2. In single configuration, it is always in OFF
Red
RD19
Normally OFF.
Indicates a primary alarm on transponder 2. TRX 2 is shut down by
monitor system due to an alarm. - In single configuration, it is always in
OFF
Green
RD9
Indication that makes it possible to check whether the transponder is on
antenna. In this case, it indicates transponder 2 on antenna: therefore,
transponder 1 is connected to the dummy load. In single configuration is on
when the TX1 is on Dummy-load
ON ANT
TX 2
ON
TX 2
WARNING
TX 2
FAULTY
TX 2
ON ANT
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
3-3
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
Table 3-3. Controls and Indications on the Front panel (Control, Commands, Station)
Definition
Color
of indicator
Reference
to Fig. 3.1
CONTROL Field
DESCRIPTION
Field with display enabled by SELECT key
ENGAGED
Yellow
RD15
Indicates that one of the operators is controlling the equipment, through
Local PC or other Remote Control (priority).
ENABLED
Green
RD10
Indicates that the local operator using the «REQUEST-RELEASE - I4» key
has acquired control of beacon commands. It flashes during the execution
of the ON/OFF and CHANGE-OVER commands.
REQUEST
RELEASE
key
I4
Press the REQUEST/RELEASE key to request control and wait for the
ENABLED indication. Button with whom the local operator (priority) can
enable or release equipment controls. This action depending of "control
superseding" parameter configuration:
Disable = overridden never on the user in operation
Enable = overridden always on the user in operation
Priority = overridden only if preset is better of priority on the user
in operation
On receiving the request, the beacon changes to AUTOMATIC mode.
Perform the desired command on/off or change over of transponder
by pressing the corresponding key EQUIP ON/OFF or CHANGE
OVER. Press the REQUEST/RELEASE key again to release the
control for PC or Remote Control. The ENGAGED indication is OFF
when the control taken by the local control.
COMMAND Field
EQUIP
ON/OFF
key
CHANGE
OVER
key
I2
Key that makes it possible to switch the beacon ON and OFF. This button is
enabled by “REQUEST/RELEASE” key.
I3
It is used to change over the conditions of operating on antenna by one or
the other transponder. Therefore, the transponders connected to the dummy
load will invert their role. This key is enabled by “REQUEST/RELEASE” key.
The transponder on antenna conditions can be deduced from the indications
of RD33 and RD9 (ON ANT) for transponder 1 and 2 respectively.
STATION field
MAINS OFF
Yellow
RD5
Indicates a mains failure (black-out or mains power off) and that the
equipment is operating with the back-up batteries.
ENV ALRM
Red
RD20
Indicates that one or more site signals are in alarm condition. For example
the signals indicating: smoke, intrusion, high temperature or failure of
obstacle lights, etc.
ANT FTY
Red
RD8
Not used (only relevant for TACAN and NDB).
OTHER
WARNING
Yellow
RD6
Normally OFF.
Extra general type indication of any alarm conditions that may not
necessarily put the equipment out of service.
The indication is associated to the WARNING indication of MAIN STATUS.
3-4
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
Table 3-4. Controls and Indications on the Front panel (LCSU status)
Definition
Color
of indicator
Reference
to Fig. 3.1
DESCRIPTION
LCSU Section
Section with display always active
Normally ON.
Indicates correct functioning of the permanent and continuous self check of
the CSB module as regards both its own HW circuits and SW programming.
Also assures continuous checking of the correctness of the +5VDC voltage
via the CSB watchdog circuit.
OPERATION
Green
RD16
WARNING
Yellow
RD7
Normally OFF.
Indicates any alarms in the CSB module such as incorrect RTC (Real Time
Clock).
DATACOM
Red
RD4
Not used.
BUZZER
S1
SIL key
I6
LAMP
TEST
key
I5
Audible alarm that informs the operator of a primary alarm on both
transponders and is activated concurrently with the MAIN STATUS ALARM
message.
The buzzer sounds until it is reset manually with the “SIL” button.
In MANUAL Mode, the buzzer is not activated.
Buzzer reset pushbutton.
Checks correct functioning of the lamps of the INC module and efficiency of
the buzzer for optical and acoustical testing purposes. This action
envisages switching off all the leds, switching on again one at a time and
then reset to the initial condition. At power-on, this test is carried out
automatically.
On CSB module PBA (printed board assembly) the following LED and keys are placed:
- green LED, indication of data on the transmission serial line
- green LED, indication of data on the receiver serial line
- green LED, watch-dog OK
- Key of reset of the CPU
The layout of module CSB is in section 5 - Maintenance and Repair - of this volume
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
3-5
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
3.2
LCSU UNIT CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
In this paragraph, feel shown examples of the screens which will be to visualize during the procedure of
configuration. The notes on the screens are of comment and memorandum during the phases of the
procedure.
The procedure of configuration of unit LSCU can be active even when the DME is operational, since the
radio beacon is managed by a specific program.
3.2.1
LCSU PARAMETER CONFIGURATION
This utility program is necessary of the all LCSU unit parameters configuration
3.2.1.1
Program install on PC
Normally the LCSU is supplied as configuration standard
3.2.1.1.1
From floppy disk
Make sure WINDOWS operating system is installed on PC
The “Util ” floppy disk configuration TERMINAL EMULATOR program containing these files:
− install.exe installation program,
− zutil.exe program to configure the modem through the Modem.exe file,
− emul.exe terminal emulator program to enable the LCSU unit configuration including the serial
and parallel lines (as well as the operation checks of all these lines through the specific “Hardware
test” program).
readme.doc text file with the information concerning the installation of the files.
Load the "UTIL" program provided on the 3,5" diskette onto the PC hard disk
− Insert the “ disk UTIL” into the 3,5" floppy disk drive (usually “a:”);
− Type the A: command and press the ENTER key;
− Type  > and press the ENTER key;
 is an indication and the actual name can be established by the user. "c:" is the usually drive
where the program is installed on hard disk.
3.2.1.1.2
From CDROM
Make sure WINDOWS operating system is installed on PC
The program is provided on CDROM complete of program "Terminal emulator configuration" in the directory
"WinSv" and includes the file:
emul.exe program "terminal emulator" to enable the configuration of LCSU unit, included the lines
parallel and serial, by the program "Hardware test"
Load the program emul.exe on the hard disk as it is known as in the section of the APPENDIX B, in this
volume.
3-6
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
3.2.2
955 900 031 C
LCSU CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
To modify the LCSU configuration parameters connect a PC to connector SK1 on the I/O panel (or directly
to the front panel of the LCSU unit named PC RS232)
This paragraph describes some video page examples that are displayed during the configuration procedure.
The notes concerning some video pages are remarks and memorandum to be followed when loading the
configuration procedure.
The LCSU configuration procedure can also be activated when the DME is operating, since the beacon is
managed by a specific program.
To load the program, proceed as follows:
− run the “EMUL.exe” program from the PC;
− press the "I1" RESET push-button on the PBA of CSB module (reached from the back of the
equipment front door);
− when the starting video page is displayed, press the keyboard space bar at least three times within a
few seconds to access the configuration mode;
− if access is not obtained with the first configuration video page, repeat the RESET operation;
− perform the configuration procedure following the instructions displayed in the menu;
− after configuration, save the variations in EEPROM; it is suggested to save the new data on a backup diskette.
− Before running the supervisor program change the parameters in the config.ini file according to
LCSU configuration.
3.2.2.1
Main Menu
Figure 3.2 shows the main video page of the configuration program. Besides the options indicated, it is also
possible to return to the previous menu by pressing the ESC key.
LCSU Maintenance Program
MAIN MENU
[1] System Overview
[2] LCSU Configuration
[3] Hardware test
[0] END
Select:
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.2. Main Menu
If, when starting up the program, an EEPROM failure is detected (faulty or containing data no longer valid),
the following message is displayed at the bottom of the video page:
Invalid configuration data, press a key to load default parameters.
NOTE: F1, F2, F5, F10 are key of PC keyboard - ESC = previous menu
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
3-7
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
3.2.2.2
System Overview
Selecting option [1] from the Main Menu the example video page shown in figure 3.3 is displayed.
The goal of this screen is to show to the operator some important feature of the software:
− Internal NAME of the equipment (CODE & MANUFACTURER);
− Programmable COMMUNICATION line;
− Number of the STATES and COMMANDS allowed for each equipment;
For each equipment:
− Number of History DATABASE provided;
− Number of DIGITAL I/O specific for the equipment.
These informations are useful during configuration job.
All the informations of this screen are fixed.
LCSU Maintenance Program
System Overview
V1.01-DMXXU101
Name
Index
States
Dbases
Dig_out
Code
Mnfct
---
---
---
---
---
Comms
Cmds
Dig_in
---
---
---
---
----------------
[0]
LCSU Unit
48
16
[1]
ANS-DMEN 415/435
80
12
Press  to exit
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.3. System Overview
V1= actual version of software
The items have the following meanings:
Index:
Name:
Mnfct:
Code:
Comms:
States:
3-8
List of equipment managed by LCSU
Managed equipment codes
Manufacturer
0 = LCSU System
1 = ANS (Thales)
Equipment code
0 = LCSU
1 = DME/N
2 = DME/P
Number of Communications Serial Port used
LCSU = 0 (No Port used)
DME = 0
Quantity of state messages available
LCSU = 48
DME = 80
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
Cmds:
955 900 031 C
Max. quantity of commands managed
LCSU = 16
DME = 3
Data Bases (History) associated to the equipment
LCSU = 1
DME = 4
Parallel input lines - Number of lines for beacon management
LCSU = 0
DME = 12
Parallel output lines - Number of lines for beacon management
LCSU = 0
DME = 0
Dbases:
Dig_in:
Dig_out:
3.2.2.3
LCSU Configuration
This screen groups the entire Submenu configuring the software and two option (EXPORT & IMPORT) to
save SAVE/RESTORE the changes made.
Selecting option [2] on the Main Menu displays the page shown in figure 3.4.
LCSU Maintenance Program
Configuration
[1] LCSU Site code
[2] Users configuration
[3] Parallel input definition
[4] Parallel output definition
[5] User connection parameters
[6] LCSU site equipment configuration
[7] LCSU site parameters
[8] Reu parameters
[9] Export LCSU configuration data
[10] Import configuration data
[0] Return
F1 - Import Data
Select:
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.4. Configuration menu
3.2.2.3.1
LCSU Site Code
Select option [1] on the “Configuration” page to enter the beacon or site identity code as shown in figure 3.5.
This screen allows the operator to change the SITE name, which is the name used by all the users (PC, RCSI
446 or RCSE445, SI 446) to communicate with the DME.
Only CAPITAL letters and DIGIT are allowed.
LCSU Maintenance Program
LCSU Site code
LCSU Site code
THAL
LCSU code (maximum 4 chars allowed):
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.5. Site Code
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
3-9
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
3.2.2.3.2
User Configuration
Selecting option [2] from the “Configuration” menu displays, the example page shown in figure 3.6.
LCSU Maintenance Program
Mode
Bps
Prot
timeout
-----
--
-------------------- -
[1] Rs232 LCPC 1
9600
10
[2] Rs232 RMPC 2
9600
10
User
---
-----
Com
Users configuration
Ident |
St
----
--
Port
Attr
Modem |
Ad Type
--
----
Phone Number
Status
Syn Ctr
Init
M/S Dual
| All | Hs | S/D |
- - -
- -
usr
--
[3] Dis
..
..
[10] Dis.
User number: 1
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.6. Users Configuration
This screen defines the parameters needed to manage the communication with the user:
− Kind of connection (RS232, Dedicated, switched, party line);
− Communication parameter (Port, Baud Rate, Protocol timeout);
− Identifier of the User;
− Kind of Modem (internal, external);
− Dialing parameters (Phone number and call logic) meaningful for switched line only;
− Master/Slave parameter (Party line only).
For each kind the connection, are to configure:
• User name
Identifier of user. It is the NAME of the user known everywhere in the network.
• Mode:
Connection modes possible for each user
0 = Dis. (disabled: as if non existent)
1 = RS232C (type of serial line)
2 = Ded.Call (dedicated telephone line via modem in “originate” mode)
3 = Ded.Answ. (dedicated telephone line via modem in “answering” mode)
4 = switched
5 = Party line
• Ident:
Identity code name of user (max. 4 alphanumeric characters).
• Com Port (Communication Port):
Valid values are from 1 to 3 (CH1, CH2 and CH3). Port 4 to 6 are reserved for internal use of
equipment.
Port 1 is generally used for local connection (line maintenance PC), Port 2 and 3 are generally used
with remote connection trough Modem (switched line, dedicated line or party line).
• St : Status Request only with switched line modems - Changing any bit of the status word – Y (yes)
the user is called upon a change of one of the main states of the equipment, N (no) in case of
equipment state variations the user is not called for updating
3-10
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
• Ad: This is a communication port used in addition to the other when the customer requires the
redundancy of the communication line. Therefore is possible to communicate with the same user
on two different lines. The additional port is used only if the first port is wrong.
A 0 value disable the line redundancy.
• Modem type: EX= External; LGM=Logem internal
• Attr Attribute
1 = Displays the states of equipment and connections; 2 = Reserved; 3 = Enables the operator to
equipment commands control; 4 = Reserved; 5 = Enables database reset and date updating
• Bps: Baud rate - Transmission rate selection (only RS232) 1:300, 2:1200, 3:2400, 4:4800, 5:9600,
• Protocol timeout
Maximum waiting time during data exchange between LCSU and user: typical 10 seconds (1 to 30 s
allowed)
• Phone Number : User phone number, only switched line (maximum 20 digits)
• Status
Syn: Synthetic - Variation of at least one of synthetic states (Normal, Warning, Alarm,
Communication faulty). - Y = (yes) it is called at every user state variation.
All: Y = (yes) the user is called whenever there is a change of one of the
equipment fundamental states. N = (no) if there is a variation in the equipment state the
user is not called for updating.
Ctr : Control - selection Y=(yes): the consumer will be called every time that another consumer
takes or liberates the control of the equipment. Selection N=(no): that consumer won't be
advised when another consumer acquire or liberated the control. Up
Hs: Database updating - Y = (yes) the authorized user is called by LCSU for a variation in the
database.
Init : Initialization (M = Mandatory, O= Optional) Recommended value: M
M/S : Definition of party-line use, of the network communication protocol (M = master, S = Slave, 0
to 9 = slave address)
Dual usr: Dual user. Enable the user redundancy.
For instance, may have two PC's redundant in the Remote site. It's sufficient to update all
only. The other PC may get the data from first.
In case of call the LCSU tries to communicate with the first PC; in case of wrong connection, it
tries with the dual user. This avoid loss of data in the switching network isn't good .
A "S" value means user redundancy disabled
A "D" value means user redundancy enabled
Dual user number. It defines the Dual user. This value must be get from the column "User" of
the screen
The allowing information needed to configure the software depends on the kind of connection, as follows:
Ö RS 232
The connection between the DME and the user is made through a serial line RS232. In general, this mode
is used when the user is on maintenance PC or on RCSI in the site.
Ö Dedicated call (direct call)
The connection between the DME and the user is made trough a Modem programmed in ORIGINATE
mode. In general, the user is a RCSI. (modem type: desk external LGM Internal (only LOGEM 28,8)
The parameters needed to make the configuration are:
• Baud rate
1:300, 2:1200, 3:2400, 4:4800, 5:9600
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
3-11
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
Ö Dedicated Answer (direct reply)
The connection between the DME and the user is made trough a Modem programmed in answer
mode
The parameters needed to make the configuration are the same as dedicated call mode.
Ö Switched line
The connection between the DME and the user is made trough a Modem programmed in Switched
mode.
The parameters needed to make the configuration are the following:
−
Additional port (Ad)
This is a communication port used in addition to the other when the customer requires the
redundancy of the communication line. Therefore is possible to communicate with the same
user on two different lines. The additional port is used only if the first port is wrong.
A 0 value disable the line redundancy.
Ö
−
Modem kind
External: a desk Modem
LOGEM: an internal Modem (only "Logem 28,8" is supported).
−
Phone number
Phone number of the user: 18 characters are allowed
−
Call logics: they define which the LCSU must call the ignore user. Syn, All, Ctr, Hs, Dual user:
definitions described status above
Party line. This kind of line is used when the DME is collocated with many equipment (in general
these of an ILS). All linked to a remote user using a multi point connection.
The parameters needed to make the configuration are the following:
−
User Mater/Slave
It defines which is the Mater of the communication, in general the user. A "M" means user is
master (this is the suggested value), an "S" means user is slave.
−
Slave Address
It define the address of the slave (from 0 to 9). If the user is Master, this is the Address of the
DME, else is the Address of the Remote
The value to set depends on the configuration made on Remote Site.
The final data for each “user” option considered, has been entered in fig. 3.7 video page. The data is shown
in sequence each time the operator enters the correct reply based on the requests sent out by the program
(in bold type). If the operator gives a wrong reply, the sequence must be repeated starting from the request
for “user number”.
The control priority is intended as the possibility to exclude the operators of the subsequent “user” from the
equipment control (an operator excluded by another with higher priority has to wait until the latter has
finished before being able to have control of the equipment). The priorities have the following order of
importance:
1 = LCSU
2 = Local PC
3 = Remote PC and any other RCSI/RCSE
The higher priority is assigned to the “user” associated to the lower number
3-12
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
LCSU Maintenance Program
Mode
User
---
-----
Com
Users configuration
Port
Ident |
St
----
--
Attr
Bps
Prot
timeout
-----
--
9600
10
9600
10
2400
10
Modem |
Ad Type
--
----
[1] Rs232 LCPC 1
[2] Rs232 RMPC 2
Ext.
Phone Number
Status
Syn Ctr
Init
M/S Dual
| All | Hs | S/D |
-------------------- - - - -
- -
[3] Ded.A
IJKL
[4] Swt
MNOP 5
Lgm. 5
10
0123456789 Y Y Y Y
M S
[5] Swt
UVXY 6
Ext.
10
22222222222 Y Y Y Y
M D
--
usr
[6] Dis
[7] Dis
[8] Dis
[9] Dis
[10]Dis
User number:
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.7. Users Configuration Table example
3.2.2.3.3
Parallel Input Definition
Selecting option [3] in the “Configuration” menu the page is displayed, showing the ports and parallel input
lines (figure 3.8) for the definition of the control logic.
LCSU Maintenance Program
[n]
port name
[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]
CONTROL INPUT
AUX INPUT 0..7
AUX INPUT 8..15
ADDITIONAL INPUT 0..3
Parallel input definition
Port:
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.8. Parallel Input Definition
The ports and input lines listed are relevant to (signals AUX In- ON/OFF):
− [0] CONTROL INPUT 0 = Managing controls and beacon commands
− [1] AUX INPUT 0..7 = Inputs to connector PL3 on the I/O panel (from AUX 0 to AUX 7)
− [2] AUX INPUT 8..15 = Inputs to connector PL3 on the I/O panel (from AUX 8 to AUX 15)
– [3] ADDITIONAL INPUT 0..3 = TTL inputs (from IN 0 to IN3)
The goal of this screen is to allow the customer to define how manage the digital input signals.
There are different kinds of signals:
− Control panel keys
Silent, Lamp, Select, Commands (Request/Release, Equipment ON/OFF, Changeover).
They use the control input port.
− Auxiliary Signals
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
3-13
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
They come from outside and in general they define an Alarm condition. They use the AUX Input 0 to 7
ports.
− Internal Signals
They come from supply modules and define an alarm condition on a power supply module. They use
AUX input 8 to 15 and additional input IN 0 to 3 ports.
Both control panel keys and internal signals are wired in fixed way, but for more flexibility, they must be
configured in this screen.
For each line of the port must be set the following parameters:
− Enabling
This line is unused, it is possible to disable it.
− Functional mode, explained forward
When an input port is selected a page is displayed similar to that shown in figure 3.9 relating to the options
selection needed to configure the INC module on the front panel.
LCSU Maintenance Program
Parallel input definition
Port: CONTROL INPUT
inp
mode
logic eqp_id
sElect
Low
Cmdkey Low
Cmdkey Low
Cmdkey Low
Lamp
Low
Buzzer
Low
Disab
Disab
control_id sharing_id
type
aux_descr
Pnl.
Pnl.
Pnl.
Press a key (= abort, <+>= next, <->= previous, = modify):
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.9. Parallel Input
For each line of the port must be set the following parameters:
Logic
Active Low/High (fig 3.10)
This is the acquiring logic for the line. For control panel keys the logic is always "Low", for
internal signal is always "High"
In general, the configuration of the auxiliary input signal can be active "high or low". The
LCSU in "high way", sees alarm when the wire are not connected.
eqp_id: equipment identifier. To obtain it from "System Overview - equipment code"
Logic: low = command closed (transistor Tr = ON)
high = command open (transistor Tr =OFF)
+Vcc
Tr
user
command
(Gnd)
module CSB
Figure 3.10. Input command Logic
control_id: an internal number from 0 to 15, ("CONTROL-ID"), used by the LCSU to communicate to
the Remote Users, in short way the signal changes
sharing_id: identifier of sharing, taken by the column of the control panel
3-14
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
type: indication of the signal type - PNL = panel (Inc), ext. = external commands, env = alarm of
environmental state of site
aux_descr: a string ("AUX-DESCR") of description, which is written on the history when the status
arrive signal changes
When a line is not used it is possible to disable with: "Disab"
The allowed function mode, are the following:
− Mode Auxiliary Input
The input is a signal carrying the status of an External Hardware line status port (smoke alarm,
temperature alarm, intrusion alarm, obstr. light …).
− Environment alarm LED lightning
The signal may be looked as an “Environment alarm". Therefore when, the signal goes in alarm
state, the corresponding LED on the Control Panel, light ON.
Figure 3.11 shows a significant example relating to the configuration for remote indications concerning the
beacon site ambient conditions and shows examples relating to indications used.
LCSU Maintenance Program
Port: AUX INPUT 0..7
inp mode
logic
Auxil
Low
Auxil
Low
Disab
Disab
Disab
Disab
Disab
Disab
Parallel input definition
eqp_id
control_id
sharing_id
type
env
aux_descr
LIGHT ON
DOOR
Line number: 1
Press a key (= abort, <+>= next, <->= previous, = modify):
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.11. Example of Beacon Site Environment
LCSU Maintenance Program
Parallel input definition
Port: AUX INPUT 8..15
inp
mode
Paral
Paral
Paral
Paral
Paral
Paral
Paral
Paral
logic
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
eqp_id
control_id
10
11
sharing_id
type aux_descr
Press a key (= abort, <+>= next, <->= previous, = modify):
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.12.a. Aux input 8...15 - Configuration Examples
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
3-15
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
LCSU Maintenance Program
Parallel input definition
Port: ADDITIONAL INPUT 0..3
inp
mode
Paral
Paral
Paral
Paral
Disab
Disab
Disab
Disab
logic
Low
Low
Low
Low
eqp_id
control_id
sharing_id
type aux_descr
Press a key (= abort, <+>= next, <->= previous, = modify):
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.12.b. Additional input 0.. 3 - Configuration Examples
In general, the auxiliary input configurations are to active high signal. In such way, the LCSU looks the
signal in alarm when the wire is not connected to.
− Command
The input is coming from the keys on the Control Panel or from an external panel.
To the signal are associated:
• An Internal Number, defining the pressed key
0=Request/Release
1=Equipment ON/OFF
2=Changeover
• The equipment identifier
This number must be kept from System Overview screen. For DME 415/435 is always =1
− Lamp test
This function define where is the Lamp Test key of the Control Panel.
No other information are required as the other keys on the Control Panel.
− Buzzer Silent
This function define how the silent key must be managed.
The only information needed is the referred equipment identifier to link to the silent key to the DME,
therefore the identifier, as explained before for the Commands, will be=1.
− Selection
This function defines the management of the "Select key" which allows the operator to enable the
"Detailed" section on the Control Panel.
The only information needed is the "Sharing Identifier" defining the equipment to show in the
"Detailed" section. In this case the Identifier is given by the column on the Control Panel when is the
Selection key. In the DME this Identifier is always =1
− Parallel internal Input
This function define the management of 12 Input Signals inside the DME cabinet carrying
information about mains and battery modules.
3-16
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
Are needed two information:
1) The equipment identifier. Obviously this is the DME and the value is always =1
2) The input identifier, which must be chosen from following table:
Table 3-5. List of the input Identifier
IDENTIFIER
MEANING
+48V dc output AC/DC module 1 fail
+48V dc output AC/DC module 2 fail
+48V dc output AC/DC module 3 fail
+48V dc output AC/DC module 4 fail
Mains AC in AC/DC module 1 fail
Mains AC in AC/DC module 2 fail
Mains AC in AC/DC module 3 fail
Mains AC in AC/DC module 4 fail
Battery disconnected
Battery pre depletion
10
+ 5vdc PWS module Subrack 1 fail
11
+ 5vdc PWS module Subrack 2 fail
Figure 3.12 shows a significant example relating to the configuration concerning the Aux input.
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
3-17
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
3.2.2.3.4
Parallel Output Definition
Selecting option [4] in the “Configuration” menu the page is displayed showing the ports and parallel output
lines (figure 3.13) for the definition of the control logic.
The ports and output lines listed in figure 3.13 are relevant to:
− [0], [1], [2], [3] OUTPUT 1, 2, 3, 4 = INC module indications
− [4], [5] AUX OUTPUT 1, 2 = AUX 0..15 outputs
− [6] ADDITIONAL OUTPUT 0..4
− [7] BUZZER = Buzzer activation
LCSU Maintenance Program
Parallel output definition
[n] port name
[0] OUTPUT 0
[1] OUTPUT 1
[2] OUTPUT 2
[3] OUTPUT 3
[4] AUX OUTPUT 0..7
[5] AUX OUTPUT 8..15
[6] ADDITIONAL OUTPUT 0..4
[7] BUZZER
Port:
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.13. Parallel Output Definition
When a port or an output line is selected, a page is displayed similar to that shown in figures 3.15 relating to
the options selection [0,1,2,3] needed to configure the INC module on the front panel, and figure 3.16 to
configure the BUZZER.
The goal of this screen is to allow the customer to define how manage the digital output signals.
They are different kinds of signals
− Control Panel Indications
"Detailed indication", Main Status Indication, "LCSU" Indications, "Station" Indication, Buzzer.
They use the ports output 0,1,2,3 and Buzzer
− Auxiliary Output Signals
They carry out to outside some internal status of interest for the customer.
They use the AUX output 0 to 7, AUX output 8 to 15 and Additional output 0 to 4 ports.
− Parallel Internal Output AUX 0 to 4
Not provided
The Control Panel indications are wired in fixed way, but for more flexibility, they must be configured too.
For each line of the port must be set the following parameters:
- Out - group of output lines
- mode - Functional mode description
- logic: Active Low/High Level (see figures 3.14 and 3.15). It defines how change the status of the
signal. The indication of the control panel acquires a "Low" state to light ON.
- eqp_id: This function will carry out a status bit of an equipment , generally to light ON an indication
- status_id: This function will light ON an indication of the "Detailed " status section.
3-18
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
- sharing_id: This function will light ON the select Indication (green arrow on the select key)
- type: signal type - pnl = panel (INC); ext. = external commands; (LEV) or (PLS)
- aux_descr: string of parameter description. A description of the moved signal (this description will be
recorded in the history database)
- "Disab" - When a line is not used
Logic: low = FET open (>5M Ω )
high = FET condutting (50 Ω m ax)
CSB module
Vdc or Vac
0ptocoupl
user out load
V retourn
(G nd)
FET
Figure 3.14. Output command Logic
LCSU Maintenance Program
Parallel output definition
Port: OUTPUT 0
out
mode
State
Detail
Detail
State
Disab
Detail
Detail
sElect
logic
Low
Low
Low
Low
eqp_id
Low
Low
Low
status_id
21
18
sharing_id
type
aux_descr
15
17
Press a key (= abort, <+>= next, <->= previous, = modify):
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.15.a. Parallel Output Definition - OUT 0
LCSU Maintenance Program
Parallel output definition
Port: OUTPUT 1
out
mode
Disab
Detail
Detail
Detail
Detail
Detail
Detail
Detail
logic
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
eqp_id
status_id
sharing_id
type
aux_descr
11
12
13
19
Press a key (= abort, <+>= next, <->= previous, = modify):
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.15.b. Parallel Output Definition - OUT 1
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
3-19
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
LCSU Maintenance Program
Parallel output definition
Port: OUTPUT 2
out
mode
Detail
Detail
Detail
Detail
Detail
Detail
Detail
Detail
logic
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
eqp_id
status_id
10
sharing_id
type
aux_descr
Press a key (= abort, <+>= next, <->= previous, = modify):
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.15.c. Parallel Output Definition - OUT 2
LCSU Maintenance Program
Parallel output definition
Port: OUTPUT 3
out
mode
State
State
State
State
Disab
Disab
Disab
Detail
logic
Low
Low
Low
Low
eqp_id
Low
status_id
12
sharing_id
type
aux_descr
14
Press a key (= abort, <+>= next, <->= previous, = modify):
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.15.d. Parallel Output Definition - OUT 3
LCSU Maintenance Program
Parallel output definition
Port: AUX OUTPUT 0…7
out
mode logic
Auxil High
Auxil High
Disab
Disab
Disab
Disab
Disab
Disab
eqp_id
status_id
sharing_id
type
pls
Lev
aux_descr
LIGHT OFF
COOLER
Press a key (= abort, <+>= next, <->= previous, = modify):
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.15.e. Parallel Output Definition - AUX OUTPUT O..7
3-20
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
LCSU Maintenance Program
Parallel output definition
Port: BUZZER
out
mode logic
Buzzer Low
Disab
Disab
Disab
Disab
Disab
Disab
Disab
eqp_id
status_id
sharing_id
type
aux_descr
Press a key (= abort, <+>= next, <->= previous, = modify):
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.16. Parallel Output Definition - Buzzer
The allowed function "mode" are the following:
• Auxiliary output
This function carries out an internal state of an equipment. It needs of the following parameters:
- A description of the moved signal (this description will be recorded in the history database)
- An Internal Number (from 0 to 15) used by the LCSU to communicate to the remote user the
change made. The internal state is the status bit of the equipment 0 (/LCSU), computed as this
number + 32.
- The kind of change to do
Pulse (PLS): the LCSU will force the signal in active state for 0,5 second and then returns to in
active states,
− Level (LEV): the signal will follow the conditions of the related internal state.
− Equipment Status ("eqp_id")
This function will carry out a status bit of an equipment , generally to light ON an indication, and
requires the following information:
•
•
The involved equipment
0=LCSU ; 1=DME
The status bit ("Status _Id")
A number kept from the table 3-7 (for DME) or 3-8 (for LCSU) in the column "Spec. Number".
This function is used in "Main Status" or "LCSU" sections of the Control Panel and for other
external control Panels.
− Selection ("sharing_id")
This function will light ON the select Indication (green arrow on the select key) when the detailed
section is enabled. It requires only the "Sharing Identifier", computed as the same parameter of
selection key (parallel input).
Therefore will be=1 always.
− Buzzer ("eqp_id")
This function defines how enable the buzzer. It receives only the "Equipment Identifier" of the
involved equipment. This parameter is always =1.
− Detailed Status ("Status_id")
This function will light ON an indication of the "Detailed " status section. It requires only the Detailed
Indication to change.
This information may be found in the following table 3-6 (column IND):
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
3-21
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
Table 3-6. List of the Detailed Status Indications
IND
DESCRIPTION
IND
DESCRIPTION
Monitor 1 Alarm
Monitor 2 Alarm
Monitor 1 StbyAlarm
Monitor 2 StbyAlarm
Monitor 1 Faulty
Monitor 2 Faulty
Monitor 1 Bypassed
Monitor 2 Bypassed
TRX1 ON
TRX2 ON
10
TRX1 Warning
11
TRX2 Warning
12
TRX1 Faulty
13
TRX2 Faulty
14
TRX1 on Antenna
15
TRX2 on Antenna
16
Control Engaged
17
Control Enabled
18
Mains OFF
19
Environment alarm
20
Antenna faulty
21
Other Warning
The linking of the Detailed Indication with the Status Bit of the equipment is made in the "LCSU Site
Equipment" status list table 3-7.
3-22
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
Table 3-7. List of Equipment Status
Spec.
Number
STATUS
Front panel “INC”
Indications
Spec.
Number
STATUS
Front panel “INC”
Indications
DATA COMM faulty
MAIN STATUS
40
Trx2 operating
NORMAL
MAIN STATUS
41
Trx2 ok
WARNING
MAIN STATUS
42
Trx2 shutdown
ALARM
MAIN STATUS
43
Trx2 degraded
Maintenance
44
Reserved
Reserved
45
Reserved
Reserved
46
Reserved
Beacon under user control
47
Reserved
Beacon off
48
Monitor 1 faulty
MON1 FAULTY
Beacon qual ok
49
Monitor 2 faulty
MON2 FAULTY
10
Beacon qual. Degraded
50
Reserved
11
Beacon qual faulty
51
Reserved
12
Beacon operating
52
Communication faulty with Monitor 1
13
Alarm
53
Communication faulty with Monitor 2
14
Warning
54
Communication faulty with TRX 1
15
Reduced power
55
Communication faulty with TRX 2
16
reserved
56
OR of equipment communic. faulty
MAIN STATUS
17
Reserved
18
Power from Battery
19
Trx standby faulty
20
Trx1 on antenna
TX1 ON ANT
21
Trx2 on antenna
TX2 ON ANT
61
Single Transponder
22
Automatic Routine Check
62
One monitor faulty
MAINS OFF
57
Beacon restart active
58
TRX 1 Warning
59
TRX 2 Warning
60
Single Monitor
23
Equipment in default parameter
63
Reserved
24
Monitor alarm disagreement
64
Trx 2 standby ok
25
Change over
65
Trx standby degraded
26
Manual control
66
Mon1 qual. Trx on ant. OK
27
Other Warning
67
Mon1 qual. Trx on ant. degraded
28
Trx 1 off
68
Mon1 qual. Trx on antenna faulty
29
Trx1 standby
69
Mon1 qual. Trx stby OK
30
Trx1 on
31
Trx1 operating
32
33
OTHER WARN
TX2 ON
TX2 FAULTY
70
Mon1 qual. Trx stby degraded
71
Mon1 qual. Trx stby faulty
Trx1 ok
72
Mon2 qual. Trx on ant. OK
Trx1 shutdown
73
Mon2 qual. Trx on ant. degraded
34
Trx1 degraded
74
Mon2 qual. Trx on ant. faulty
35
Reserved
75
Mon2 qual. Trx stby OK
36
Trx 1 F.A. faulty
76
Mon2 qual. Trx stby degraded
37
Trx 2 off
77
Mon2 qual. Trx stby faulty
38
Trx2 standby
78
Monitor 1 bypass
MON1
BYPASSED
39
Trx2 on
79
Monitor 2 bypass
MON2
BYPASSED
Vers. D, September 2005
TX1 ON
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
MON1 STBALRM
MON2 STBALRM
3-23
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
Table 3-8. List of the Indications from LCSU to User
Spec.
Number
STATUS
“INC”
Indications
2 (*)
DATA COM
NORMAL
WARNING (*)
LCSU WARNING
Spec.
Number
9()
STATUS
“INC”
Indications
Clock calendar faulty
10 ( )
History faulty
11 ( )
Clock calendar warning
ALARM
12 ( )
Environmental Alarm
MAINTENANCE
13 ( )
Frozen state
14,15
16..31
Auxiliary input 0...15
7( )
LCSU under user control
32..47
Auxiliary output 0...15
8()
Battery faulty
Watch Dog ( Hardware)
ENV ALRM
LCSU
OPERATION
(*) Warning = "OR" of the Specification Number "8 ( ) to 13 ( )"
3.2.2.3.5
Commands equipments list
In this paragraph are listed the available controls to command the different equipment.
They can be assigned to parallel on/off inputs, coming from the control panel or external devices.
To configure the inputs, enter the number corresponding to the desired command required.
Table 3-9. Equipment Commands list
EQUIPMENT
DME AN 415/435
DME FSD 40/45
3-24
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
take/release the control
beacon on/off
changeover
beacon off (No valid on DME 415/435)
tx 1 main (No valid on DME 415/435)
tx 2 main (No valid on DME 415/435)
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
3.2.2.3.6
955 900 031 C
User Connection Parameters
Select option [5] on the “Configuration” menu to display the page shown in figure 3.17 that enables
modification of some modem connection parameters.
LCSU
User connection parameters
Leased line parameters
[0] Connection attempt duration: 60 sec. (20 - 120)
Switched line parameters
[1] Connection speed:
(1: 300 , 2: 1200, 3: 2400,
4: 4800, 5: 9600)
[2] Dial attempt duration:
90 sec (20 - 120).
[3] 2nd call delay:
min.
[4] 3rd call delay:
min.
[5] 4th call delay:
10
min.
[6] Subsequent calls delay:
min. (0: disabled)
[7] Full connect. idle timeout: 0
min. (0: disabled)
[8] Delay before call-back:
10
sec.
[9] Call back
(0:disable 1:enable)
Party line parameters
[10] Preliminary waiting time: 0 sec (1 - 5000, 0:disable)
[11] Post waiting time:
0 sec (1 - 5000, 0:disable) Up to march 05
[12] Intermediate waiting time: 0 sec (1 - 5000, 0:disable)
Select:
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.17. User Connection Parameters
Below the meanings of each parameter that can be modified are given:
- Connection attempt duration
time interval within which the connection in dedicated line should take place.
- Connection speed
Baud rate of the connection between LCSU and Modem
- Dial attempt duration
time interval within which the connection in switched line should take place
- 2nd call delay
time to wait before retry the second call in case of dial connection not made. – 0 means no retry
- 3rd call delay
time to wait before retry the 3rd call in case of dial connection not made. – 0 means no retry
- 4th call delay
time to wait before retry the 4th call in case of dial connection not made. – 0 means no retry
- Subsequent calls delay
delay time for subsequent calls - 0 (disabled): the user is not called again after an unsuccessful attempt.
- Full connect. idle timeout
maximum connection time allowed in full without exchange of messages.
- Delay before call-back
Delay between end of call and call-back.
- Call back
Call-back enable. When called, the LCSU recall the User in order to authorize it to send the commands, if
enabled for this operation.
Party-line parameters: waiting times of communication
- Preliminary waiting time:
0 msec (1 - 5000, 0: disable)
- Post waiting time:
0 msec (1 - 5000, 0: disable) Up to march 05
- Intermediate waiting time: 0 msec (1 - 5000, 0: disable)
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
3-25
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
3.2.2.3.7
LCSU Site Equipment Configuration
This screen option [6] (figure 3.18) allow the customer to link the outputs mapped as "Detailed" in the
"Parallel Output Definition" to the Equipment Status (see table 3-7) - List of Equipment Status –
The elements have the following effect:
Description:
description of the equipment to be represented
Manuf:
Producer: 0 = LCSU System, 1 = Thales (ANS)
Eqp code
equipment code: 0 = LCSU, 1 = DME/N, 2 = DME/P, 3 = NDB 436
Position in Main Status LCSU = Disab; 1 = equipment on which LCSU is assembled
Select:
1 = line configuration; 2 = detailed status configuration
Inserting selection 2 "Detailed status configuration" is shown the fig. 3.19
First must be set the "position in Main Status", that indicates the position on the Control Panel, where is
shown the equipment status. For the DME this position is always =0
The next sub-screen (figure 3.19) allows, doing the linking said before.
Each selection is referred to an indication on the control Panel (in the Detailed Status section). The value to
set must be kept in the table 3-7.
A value=1 disable the indication. For instance, the DME doesn't have the status of the antenna, then the
indication [20] (Antenna faulty) must be disabled.
The indication [16] (control Engaged), [17] (control Enabled) and [19] (Environment Alarm) don't have any
reference to the equipment status; therefore a value different than the 1 (disable) is shown as enabled.
The indication [22] (Mains status label) allow the operator to define the label to set in the display on the main
status
LCSU Maintenance Program
[n]
Description
[0]
[1]
LCSU unit
ANS-DMEN 415/435
LCSU site equipment configuration
Manuf
Equip. Code
Position in Main status
Dis
Select:
1: Line configuration
F1 - Import Data
2: Detailed Status Configuration
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.18. LCSU Site equipment menu
LCSU Maintenance Program
Equipment: 1
LCSU site equipment configuration
Position in Main status: 1
[0]
[2]
[4]
[6]
[8]
[10]
[12]
[14]
[16]
[18]
[20]
Monitor 1 Alarm
Monitor 1 Stand-by Alarm
Monitor 1 Faulty
Monitor 1 Bypassed
Trx 1 On
Trx 1 Warning
Trx 1 Faulty
Trx 1 On Antenna
Control engaged
Mains off
Antenna faulty
[22]
Main status label: THAL
:68
:71
:48
:78
:31
:58
:33
:20
:Ena
:18
:Dis
[1]
[3]
[5]
[7]
[9]
[11]
[13]
[15]
[17]
[19]
[21]
Monitor 2 Alarm
Monitor 2 Stand-by Alarm
Monitor 2 Faulty
Monitor 2 Bypassed
Trx 2 On
Trx 2 Warning
Trx 2 Faulty
Trx 2 On Antenna
Control engaged
Environment alarm
Other warning
:74
:77
:49
:79
:40
:59
:42
:21
:Ena
:Ena
:27
Select the item to change (0 to 22):
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.19. Status of LCSU Site equipment
3-26
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
3.2.2.3.8
955 900 031 C
LCSU Site Parameter
This screen option [7] (figure 3.20) allow the operator to change some information about the site:
[0] Number of changing before status freezing:
This parameters allows the operator to stop the recording of some auxiliary input that changes is
value too fast. This option prevent the history database is filled with a lot of unused records.
[1] Control superside
It defines how the LCSU must manage the Control Request coming from outside or from the control
Panel when another user is controlling the equipment.
Three choice are allowed:
1) Disable: a new Control Request is refused, an user that has the equipment control cannot be
interrupted by another user
2) Enable: it is the opposite of the previous item, any user may keep the equipment control,
interrupting any other user.
3) On Priority: this is the classic way to manage the Request. The control Request is accepted
only if the requestor has an higher priority than the present owner.
The Local Control Panel has the highest priority, than follows the local PC and the Remote
Control RCSI. The priority is computed as the number of intermediate nodes between the user
and equipment.
LCSU Maintenance Program
[0]
[1]
LCSU site parameter
Number of changing before status freezing:
Control superside:
(1-100, 0:disabled)
(0:dis, 1:on prior, 2:Ena)
Dis
Select:
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.20. LCSU Site parameter
3.2.2.3.9
REU parameters
Selecting option [8] in the “Configuration” menu the page of figure 3.21 is displayed. This screen enables the
change to the parameters of the REU (When equipment is in station system with Remote Equipment Unit on
RCSE unit, otherwise the values won't be considered).
LCSU Maintenance Program
Reu parameters
[0] Lke Equipment address:
160 (0..4095)
[1] Lke Reu address:
16 (0..4095)
[2] Modem identifier:
MODEM 001
Select:
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.21. Reu Parameters
This table must be compiles in a system of connection in telephone switched line with remote control type
REU - Otherwise the values won't be considered.
- In the option [0] some first line must be inserts the identifier of the LCSU: value to be deduced from the
manual of the remote control REU to which is postponed
- In the option [1] must be inserts the identifier of the remote control REU: value to be deduced from the
manual of the remote control REU to which is postponed
- In the option [2] must be inserts always the string "Modem 001"
Identifiers of LCSU and of REU must have carry over in the file *. ptt to be loaded in the program of REU
necessarily called "LLKE".
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
3-27
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
3.2.2.3.10
Export Configuration Data
Select the option [9] on the menu “Configuration” to show on the display (fig. 3.22) the page with the
procedure of export of the configuration data with the information: LCSU ready to send configuration dates
to the PC. Press key F1 to transfer the configuration data from the LCSU to PC after entering the indication
requested relevant to the name of the file where the data is to be stored.
LCSU Maintenance Program
Export LCSU configuration data
LCSU ready to send configuration data to the PC
Start the operation by pressing  key.
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.22. Export LCSU configuration data
3.2.2.3.11
Import Configuration Data
To select the option [10] on the menu “Configuration” to show on the display (fig. 3.23), the page with the
procedure of import of the configuration data with the information: LCSU ready to get configuration dates
from the PC. Press key F2 to start the configuration data loading from PC to LCSU.
LCSU Maintenance Program
Import LCSU configuration data
LCSU ready to get configuration data from the PC
Start the operation by pressing  key.
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.23. Import LCSU configuration data
3.2.2.3.12
Hardware Test
Select option [3] from the Main menu to display the page shown in figure 3.24 containing the options relating
to functionality verification of the input and output ports and the control emulating the serial lines.
LCSU Maintenance Program
Hardware Test
[1] Test of parallel input port
[2] Test of parallel output port
[3] Test of serial lines
[0] Return
Select: []
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.24. Hardware Test
3-28
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
3.2.2.3.13
955 900 031 C
Test of Parallel Input Port
Select option [1] on the “Hardware Test” menu to display the page shown in figure 3.25 that is used to test
the input ports.
LCSU Maintenance Program
[n]
port name
[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]
CONTROL INPUT
AUX INPUT 0..7
AUX INPUT 8..15
ADDITIONAL INPUT 0..3
Test of parallel input port
Select:
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.25. Test of Parallel Input Port
Some examples of tests that can be made to verify the inputs listed below are shown in the figures that
follow:
CONTROL INPUT (figure 3.26)
The test is performed through the push-buttons on the INC module, which can be found according to the
configured arrangement using the procedure described in paragraph 3.2.2.3.3
AUX INPUT (figure 3.27)
the test is performed by creating a closure to the common pin, through the pins on connector PL3 of the I/O
panel. These can be found according to the configured arrangement using the procedure described in
paragraph 3.2.2.3.3.
ADDITIONAL INPUT (figure 3.28)
the test is performed by creating a closure to the common pin, through the pins on connector PL3 of the I/O
panel. These can be found according to the configured arrangement using the procedure described in
paragraph 3.2.2.3.3.
Port: CONTROL INPUT - Current read line status:
1->LOW 2->LOW 3->LOW 4->LOW 5->LOW 6->LOW 7->LOW 8->LOW
Press a key to start status monitor or  to exit.
** Monitor on input line active **
Changed line number 2 LOW ==> HIGH
Changed line number 2 HIGH ==> LOW
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.26. Test Control Input
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
3-29
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
Port: AUX INPUT 0..7 - Current read line status:
1->HIGH 2-> HIGH 3-> HIGH 4-> HIGH 5-> HIGH 6-> HIGH 7-> HIGH 8-> HIGH
Press a key to start status monitor or  to exit.
** Monitor on input line active **
Changed line number 8 HIGH ==> LOW
Changed line number 8 LOW ==> HIGH
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.27. Test Aux Input
Test Aux Input
Port: ADDITIONAL INPUT - Current read line status:
1->HIGH 2->HIGH 3->HIGH 4->HIGH 5->HIGH 6->HIGH 7->LOW 8->HIGH
Press a key to start status monitor or  to exit.
** Monitor on input line active **
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.28. Test Additional Input
3.2.2.3.14
Test of Parallel Output Port
Select option [2] on the “Hardware Test” menu to display the page shown in figure 3.29 that is used to test
the parallel output ports.
LCSU Maintenance Program
Test of parallel output port
[n]
port name
[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
OUTPUT 0
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 3
AUX OUTPUT 0..7
AUX OUTPUT 8..15
ADDITIONAL OUTPUT 0..4
BUZZER
Select:
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.29. Test of Parallel Output Port
3-30
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
The operator can choose to test all eight lines of each port or only separate lines (A = all bits or n = line
number). LEDs on the INC module light up after the selection to indicate that the selected line is operating
correctly. The AUX OUTPUT lines have to be checked with an ohmmeter if they are not connected to
specific indicators.
Using <+> and <-> keys the operator may also check brightness of the LEDs on the Control Panel. The
brightness is arranged in 7 levels, shown in the column Bright.
This procedure is meaning only if the port under test is referring to the Control Panel
The figures below show some examples of tests to check the following outputs:
OUTPUT 0,1, 2, 3 (figure 3.30)
use the keyboard to select the line to be tested and check output variation.
AUX OUTPUT (figure 3.31)
use the keyboard to select the line to be tested and check output variation.
BUZZER (figure 3.32)
Port: OUTPUT 1 - All lines initialized to ACTIVE status:
Select line to change (A = all bits; 1-8 = line number; <+>, <->= brightness) or  to exit.
1->LOW 2->HIGH 3->LOW 4->LOW 5->LOW 6->LOW 7->LOW 8->LOW
1->LOW 2->LOW 3->LOW 4->LOW 5->LOW 6->LOW 7->LOW 8->LOW
1->LOW 2->HIGH 3->LOW 4->LOW 5->LOW 6->LOW 7->LOW 8->LOW
1->HIGH 2->LOW 3->HIGH 4->HIGH 5->HIGH 6->HIGH 7->HIGH 8->HIGH
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
BRIGHT=3
BRIGHT=3
BRIGHT=3
BRIGHT=3
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.30. Test Output port 1
Port: AUX OUTPUT - All lines initialized to ACTIVE status:
Select line to change (A = all bits; 1-8 = line number; <+>, <->= brightness) or  to exit
1->HIGH 2->HIGH 3->HIGH 4->HIGH 5->HIGH 6->HIGH 7->HIGH 8->HIGH
1->LOW 2->LOW 3->LOW 4->LOW 5->LOW 6->LOW 7->LOW 8->LOW
1->HIGH 2->HIGH 3->HIGH 4->HIGH 5->HIGH 6->HIGH 7->HIGH 8->HIGH
1->HIGH 2->LOW 3->HIGH 4->LOW 5->HIGH 6->HIGH 7->HIGH 8->HIGH
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
BRIGHT=3
BRIGHT=3
BRIGHT=3
BRIGHT=3
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.31. Test Aux Output
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
3-31
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
Port: BUZZER - All lines initialized to ACTIVE (LOW) status:
Select line to change (A = all bits; 1-8 = line number; <+>, <->= brightness) or  to exit
1->HIGH 2->HIGH 3->HIGH 4->HIGH 5->HIGH 6->HIGH 7->HIGH 8->HIGH
1->LOW 2->HIGH 3->HIGH 4->HIGH 5->HIGH 6->HIGH 7->HIGH 8->HIGH
1->HIGH 2->HIGH 3->HIGH 4->HIGH 5->HIGH 6->HIGH 7->HIGH 8->HIGH
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.32. Test Buzzer
3.2.2.3.15
Test of Serial Lines
Select option [3] on the “Hardware Test” menu to display the page shown in figure 3.33 that is used to
perform the tests on serial lines.
LCSU Maintenance Program
Test of serial lines
Serial port number to test (1 to 6):
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.33. Test of Serial Lines
When the number of the port to be tested is selected, a page is displayed similar to that shown in figure
3.34, that indicates an example of a test on port number 2, for which a modem connection is necessary.
Testing port number: 2
Press a key to start emulation or  to abort
** Emulation program active Exit Test DTR/DCD Loop **
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.34. Testing of Port Number
NOTES
− The serial port diagnostics are performed when module CSB on the LCSU is
powered on;
3-32
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
− The request to test port 1 is followed by a message “The emulation port is not
testable. Press a key to continue...” since this is the connection port to the PC
that the operator is using to dialogue;
− For DME equipment the modem 1 and 2 is usually connected to serial port 2
and 3 (PL2 and PL1 of I/O panel);
− The functional verification is performed by typing one or more alphanumeric
characters from the keyboard, the relevant echo is shown on the PC screen;
− The operator must respond to the request to define the baud rate of the
modem, if provided on the serial port to be tested:
1 = 300; 2 = 1200 ; 3 = 2400 ; 4 = 4800 ; 5 = 9600; 6 = 19200
− Upon the request message PARITY (N)one, E(ven), O(dd); “N” in other cases.
3.2.2.4
Test Data Consistency
To terminate the configuration procedure it is necessary to return to the “Configuration” page and select
option [0].
The program then asks the operator whether the configuration data modifications saving procedure is to be
performed. The following message will be displayed:
“Save configuration changes? (Y/N):”
If the reply is “Y” a test is run that can be seen in figure 3.35. If the result is positive, the last line will display
the message:
“Press a key to start saving.”
whereas if the result is negative the previous message is replaced by the indication of the fault found. (E.g.:
“E2PROM faulty, data not saved. Press any key to continue..”)
The saving operation is indicated by a row of asterisks that appear in sequential order at the end of the
operation.
Testing data consistency...
Testing site code... OK
Testing port connection... OK
Testing user identification codes... OK
Testing buzzer connection... OK
Testing control commands equipment connection... OK
Testing commands equipment connection... OK
Press a key to start saving.
F1 - Import Data
F2 - Export Data
F5 - Clear Video
F10 - Quit
Figure 3.35. Test Data Consistency
3.2.2.5
To Exit from the Program
To exit from the configuration procedure, first return to the “MAIN MENU” and select option [0].
To close the “EMUL.exe” program, press F10 (quit.).
CAUTION
Do not forget to select the option [0] of the "Main Menu": the CSB does not leave the configuration program
if you press F10 key only.
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
3-33
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
3.2.2.6
Modem Configuration
When using a modem for connections to the different units at a distance from the site where the beacons
are installed, it has to be suitably configured for the specific service it is prepared for.
Modems used for the various connections have to operate:
− in the phonic band (300 - 3400 Hz);
− on 2-wire dedicated or switched lines;
− in accordance with CCITT V21, V22 and V22bis standards;
− with AT protocol controls;
− with asynchronous mode communication.
The modem configuration is prepared modifying its internal parameters through AT controls.
The configuration may be in two ways:
1. Connect a PC to the modem using a terminal emulation program; it is then possible to modify the
relevant parameters using a series of AT commands.
This type of operation requires detailed knowledge of the modem parameters.
2. Connect a PC to the modem and run the program typing in , then press the
ENTER key.
The modem.exe program imports the configuration data from the mdfile.mdm file and sends it, in
sequence, to the modem, verifying each time that it has been accepted correctly.
The UTIL - Configuration Utility diskette contains several examples of *.mdm files previously prepared for
some types of modem. The AT standard does not guarantee that all modems have the same commands,
therefore it is necessary to prepare the *.mdm files for each specific modem. These files can be edited by
the user, starting from one of the existing examples and using a normal text editor the desired parameters
can be modified to obtain the suitable file.
The main parameters to be configured in order to work correctly with LCSU are:
AT&L0(1)
line type (dedicated or switched)
ATB0 CCITT full duplex standard
ATFn
line speed (n defines the standard and depends on the modem used)
AT&C1
Interfaced criteria forced to work state
ATX0
Blind dial without busy or ready tone recognition
AT&D3 DTR
transition ON -> OFF cause modem reset
AT&G0
Guard tone disabled
ATS10=40
Carrier faulty disconnect delay time 1/10 s
ATT(P)
Tone/pulse dialing
ATS0=2
Number of rings (only in switched)
3-34
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
3.2.3
955 900 031 C
File Configuration in Supervisory Program
A personal computer can be connected in the following way:
− LOCAL, directly through a serial port.
− REMOTE, through a modem on dedicated or switched lines.
Installation and procedure refer APPENDIX B –"PC User WINDOWS SUPERVISOR" section
Examples are in figure 3.36
RS-232
SERIAL LINE
Internal
or External
"REMOTE" PC
MODEM
MODEM
(e.g.COM1)
Mouse
Printer
DME
"LOCAL" PC
(laptop or
desktop type)
"REMOTE" PC
Mouse
TELEPHON LINE
switched or dedicated line
RS-232C -SERIAL LINE
Internal
or External
EQU IPMEN T
M A IN ST ATUS
Printer
DE TA I LE D S TAT US
RCSI
RC SI 446
Mouse
MODEM
C OMM A ND
REMOTE CONTROL RCSI
Printer
Figure 3.36. System control via PC (example)
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
3-35
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
3.3
INDICATORS ON THE MODULES
This paragraph shows the set of indicators on the various modules of the beacon. The LCSU front indicators
are described in table 3-1. The front outlines of the modules are gives on the figures 3.37, 3.38, 3.39 and
indicators of each module are described in table 3-10.
Table 3-10. LEDs Indicators on the Front of every modules
Module
REF
Red
PWS
MON
DPR
Lamp
color
LABEL
PWS Faulty
Possible overload, overvoltage, overheat or module failure
AFI
TKW
AC/DC
Green
INPUT
Correctly input voltage
ON
Red
WATCHDOG
LED on when failure of Watchdog operation (Monitor CPU: stop condition)
OFF
RD5
Yellow
Morse Code
The led ON during the decoded and self check of identity frequency (1350
Hz)
RD3
Yellow
TRX ALARM
The LED ON, when secondary and primary alarm of
antenna occur
RD2
Red
MON FTY
The LED ON when failure self-check on Monitor module occur.
RD1
Green
EXEC. MON
LED ON when monitoring Executive is running normally
Yellow
IDENTITY
The LED ON when DME transmitted identity code
Red
WDOG
The ON indication, directly connection with CPU watchdog, to indicate OFF
failure operation. (During watchdog self check procedure and reset test
initialization, the led flash once)
Green
MOD
The LED flashes during the running of the modulation task. Failure of the flash
modulation task with led continuously off or on.
Green
CAL
The LED flashes each 5/6 seconds, during the running of the calibration flash
task (pilot pulse). Failure of the calibration task with led continuously off or
on.
Green
COD
The LED is ON during the running of the Morse code task . Failure of the
Morse code task with LED continuously off.
Green
CHK
The LED flashes each 10/15 seconds, during the memory (RAM, flash
EPROM,…) self check. Failure of the self-check operation with led
continuously off or on.
Red
RF PROT
LED ON when antenna or Dummy-Load not connected (or output module OFF
not loaded on 50 ohm)
Green
RF ON
LED ON for transmitter with output RF
Green
DC/DC ON
Command and internal 50Vdc (40V typical value for DME415) power supply ON
is OK in ON operation
transponder in
OFF
ON
Yellow
IDENTITY
LED ON for Morse code identification in normal operation
Red
RF PROT
LED ON when antenna or Dummy-Load not connected (or output module OFF
not loaded on 50 ohm)
Green
RF ON
LED ON for transmitter with output RF in normal irradiated condition
Green
DC/DC ON
Command and internal 50Vdc (typical value) power supply is OK in ON ON
operation
Green
Module OK
ON in normal operation (DC/DC out voltage OK)
ON
Green
Mains OK
Correctly mains input voltage in normal operation
ON
ON
Green
Internal LED (rear of anterior door)– CSB watchdog to indicate normal ON
operation (LED OFF = failure watchdog operation)
Green
Internal LED (rear of anterior door) – serial signal RX indication
flash
Green
Internal LED (rear of anterior door) - serial signal TX indication
flash
CSB
3-36
OFF
RD4
DMD
TX
Normal
condition
DESCRIPTION
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
Power
Supply
955 900 031 C
Monitor
Receiver
Digital
Processor
Modulator
PBA
PBA
RESET
WATCH DOG (red)
INPUT (green)
LED
MORCO
LOG
OVRL
GND
MON FTY (red)
RESET
EXEC. MON (green)
TP1 +5V
TP2 +15V
Test
points
TP3 -15V
LED
A MOD
MEAS. SYNC
Test
points
TOA N
LOG P
MOD ST
CAL
MD
RXINH
RESET
TRIG
RF ON
RXINH
MOD N
CALIB
Test
points
CAL
GND
GND
DC/DC ON (green)
N.U.
N.U.
TRGOUT
LOG N
LM INT
GND
RF ON (green)
COD
(green)
CHK
(green)
H MORse COde
OUT MUX
LED
CAL
(green)
SPINH
N.U.
IDT
Test
points
RF PROT (red)
MOD
(green)
DEADT
TOA P
OCV analog
OCV gate
SW1
WDOG
(red)
DPNPSQ
MORse COde (yellow)
TRX ALARM (yellow)
converter
SQI
LED
Heat Sink
DC/DC
IDENT.(yellow)
PWS FAULTY (red)
Transmitter/driver
DC/DC OUT
V MOD
MOD P - N.U.
MOD SQR
RF DET
GND
GND
SQIDBP
Test
points
GF
GND
AGRDW
CM1
AGREN
PBA
PBA
RF circuits
Casting
PWS
PBA
RF circuits
casting
PBA
Pushbutton
TRx on ANT.
NPR
TH_COMP
DISCH
RF and IF
circuits
casting
DISAB
MON
RX
DPR
DMD
TX
Figure 3.37. LED indicators on transponder modules
3-37
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
3-37
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
OUT
OUT
I/O
TKW 1
TKW 2
DPX 1
DPX 2
IN
IN
IN
OUT
RF PROT (red)
RF PROT (red)
RF ON (green)
RF ON (green)
DC/DC ON (green)
DC/DC ON (green)
AFI
MDM1
DC/DC OUT
V1
V2
V3
V4
V5
RF DET
Identity
facility
(yellow)
DC/DC OUT
V1
V2
V3
V4
V5
RF DET
MDM2
TAI
dummy
GND
GND
Figure 3.38. LED indicators on 1 kWp RF amplifiers and AFI modules
Module OK
V adj
TP
Mains OK
Data/Test button
Data/Test button
Earphone connector
AC/DC
TEST
TEST
SERV
ANS
PM1
S1
M1
LED
OFF HOOK = blinks
LED ON=test activated
LED ON=DTE is ready
SERV
M5
PM1
S2
M2
Earphone connector
LED CD
LED Test
LED RTS & DSK
blinks= MODEM deactivates
LED CTS
LED ON=MODEM is ready
Telephone access jack
Telephone access jack
LGM 28,8
LGM1200
Figure 3.39. LED indicator on AC/DC power supply module and on the MODEM
3-38
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 -Operation & Use
3.4
Ref. 955 900 031 C
I/O FUNCTIONING
The equipment can be controlled form the site where the beacon is installed (local site) or from a remote
station (remote site).
At the local site, the equipment can be controlled thorough direct use of the controls on the LCSU Front
Panel or using a PC (Personal Computer) connected to the PC RS-232 connector or SK1 of I/O panel.
Usually, the priority of remote connections is lower than that of the local connections (default condition)
At the local site equipment control, priority is: Control Panel and lastly PC connected to the LCSU unit.
The local operator can activate local commands using the REQUEST RELEASE button, thereby disabling
any commands received from a remote operator. The indications remain active on all the remote stations
connected.
From the remote site, the equipment can be controlled via a PC connected directly to the LCSU unit through
a switched or dedicated line modem.
Operation mode Intrusive or detailed, Line monitoring, Maintenance and so on, are allowed only using a PC
(in Local or Remote site) connected in any mode (directed, trough interposed RCSI/RCSE/MCS, Switched
line and so on)
A detailed description of the permissible operations of the PC with supervisor program is used, is given in
next paragraphs and APPENDIX sections.
3.5
USER SOFTWARE INSTALLATION ON PC
3.5.1
General
The use of usual PC standards and operating systems ensures a familiar operating environment for the
user.
The most important status displays and control functions are also provided on the station’s front local control
unit (LCSU) so that operation is easy also without a PC system connected. Using a PC connected to
connector SK1 - RS-232 (PC) with a user program (WINSV, WINDME400 or MCS) all informations are
provided.
The dialog software represents the core of the operation devices. All control, monitoring, and maintenance
functions are represented on the screen in colors, in the form of menus. They are carried out in control
windows by means of functional keys or mouse control.
Via an online help function texts explaining functions or screen masks can be requested and, if required,
printed out. The user software interprets the operating data input by the operator, checks it for plausibility,
formats it into a specified format, and transmits it to the respective system or subsystem components
(monitor, transmitter). This operating data and the data for remote maintenance is input via the keyboard of
a personal computer (PC desktop or laptop) by authorized operating personnel of the respective operator
(usually air traffic control authorities).
System control can be ensured via the PC with the same software both in local mode in direct connection to
the system and in remote mode via a modem link. Depending on the selected modem, the data can be
transmitted via a switched line or a dedicated line. If a switched line is used the subsystem is automatically
selected by the remote station if the selection on the PC has been made accordingly.
Status information of the subsystem is represented on the PC screen in an easily interpretable form. Via a
printer connected to the PC system data can be printed out and thus documented.
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
3-39
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
3.5.2
PC user programs INSTALLATION
NOTE: The connection and control of the PC and the operating system software are to be carried out in
compliance with the manufacturer documentation. It is assumed that the user is familiar with the basics of
PC hardware handling, floppy disk handling, and the operating system (WINDOWS 95 or NT). The
respective handling instructions in the manufacturer documentation must be observed.
The connection of the PC is established via RS232 serial cable. For local mode, the cable is connected to
the RS-232 terminal on the front panel (LCSU) or SK1 of I/O Panel of the DME cabinet.
Examples of programs references to be installed on PC are in figures 3.40, 3.41, 3.42, Errore. L'origine
riferimento non è stata trovata.
PC Programs:
WINSV
WIN DME
or MCS program
PC Programs:
WINSV
WIN DME
or MCS program
Internal
or External
"REMOTE" PC
MODEM
MODEM
PC Programs:
ADRACS
WIN SV ADRACS
WIN DME
(e.g.COM1)
Printer
DME
"LOCAL" PC
(laptop or
desktop type)
TELEPHON LINE
switched or dedicated line
RS-232C -SERIAL LINE
Internal
or External
Printer
EQU IPMEN T
M AIN ST ATUS
R CSI
DETAILE D S TAT US
"REMOTE" PC
RC SI 446
MODEM
C OM M A ND
Printer
REMOTE CONTROL RCSI or RCSE
Figure 3.40. Examples of PC user programs with DME stand alone
REMOTE CONTROL STATUS INDICATOR
RCSI 446-2
MAI N STATUS
E QU IP M ENT
DE TAILED STATUS
STATUS INDICATOR
SI 446 - 2
RCS I
R CS I 446
SI
EQU IP M E NT ST A TU S
RS 422/485
RS 422 (<1km)
PC Programs:
ADRACS
WIN SV ADRACS
WIN DME
ON
ALA RM
ALA RM
WA RN ING
WA RN ING
N OR M AL
N OR M AL
L AM P
CO MM AND
SIL
T EST
Switched or dedicated teleph. LINE
CONTROL TOWER
CENTER CONTROL ROOM
DEDICATED LINE
RS 232
STATUS INDICATOR
SI 446 - 2
SI
E QU IP M E NT S TA TU S
PC Programs:
WINSV
WINDME
RS 232
ON
ALA RM
ALA RM
WA RN ING
WA RN ING
N OR M AL
N OR M AL
LAM P
TEST
SIL
DME
(D)VOR
Modem
EQUIPMENTS LOCAL SITE
Figure 3.41. Examples of PC user programs in VOR-DME system
3-40
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 -Operation & Use
Ref. 955 900 031 C
REMOTE SERVICE MAINTENANCE
CONTROL CENTER
PC Programs:
ADRACS
WIN SV ADRACS
WIN DME
CONTROL TOWER
REMOTE CONTROL
RCSI 446-8 or RCSE
SI
EQUIPMENT STATUS
EQUIPMENT
RS 232
M AIN STAT US
RCSI
DE TAILE D STATU S
MON 2
TX 1
MON 1
RS 422 (< 1 Km.)
O PE RA TI ON
TX 2
W A RN IN G
ST AN D BY
ALARM
ALARM
WARNI NG
WARNI NG
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
ALARM
ALARM
ST AN D BY
FA UL TY
FA UL TY
BY PA SS ED
WARNING
WARNI NG
BY PA SS ED
WA RN IN G
FA UL TY
O N AN T
WA RN IN G
FA UL TY
D ATA CO M
O N AN T
ON
AL AR M
AL AR M
WA RN IN G
WA RN IN G
W A RN IN G
N OR M AL
N OR MAL
AL AR M
AL AR M
AL AR M
AL AR M
AL AR M
WA RN IN G
W A RN IN G
WA RN IN G
W A RN IN G
N OR MAL
N OR M AL
N OR MAL
N OR M AL
AL AR M
W A RN IN G
WARNI NG
LA MP
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
D ATA CO M
D ATA CO M
D ATA CO M
D ATA CO M
D ATA CO M
SE LE CT
SE LE CT
SE LE CT
SE LE CT
SE LE CT
NORMAL
D ATA CO M
NORMAL
D ATA CO M
NORMAL
SE LE CT
CONTROL
STATION
EN G AG ED
MAI N S OF F
EN A BLE D
EN V A LRM
N OR MAL
D ATA CO M
N OR MAL
SI L
TE ST
SI L
COMMAND
SE LE CT
EQ U IP
C HA NG E
R EQ UE ST
O N/ O FF
O VE R
R ELE AS E
AN T FT Y
SE LE CT
O TH ER W A R N
STATUS INDICATOR
SI 446-8 or RCSE/CTU
RCSI 446
L1 - DEDICATED LINE
Party Line
DEDICATED LINE - L3
L2 - DEDICATED
or SWITCHED LINE
PC Programs:
ADRACS
PC Programs:
ADRACS
PC Programs:
ADRACS
PC Programs:
ADRACS
PC Programs:
WINSV
WINDME
RS 232
RS 232
MARKER
ILS
ILS
LOC
GP
Site 1
DME
DME
(D)VOR
Site 3
PC Programs:
WINSV
WINDME
Site 2
Site 4
EQUIPMENTS LOCAL SITES
Figure 3.42. Examples of PC user programs with multi-sites
For installation on PC of the MCS program to see the suitable technical manual
3.5.2.1
PC REQUIREMENTS
The user operating software must be installed on a PC system. The PC must meet the recommended
requirements described on APPENDIX B in this volume.
3.6
INSTALLATION ON PC OF USER OPERATING PROGRAM
Detailed procedures of installation are on APPENDIX "B" of this volume
a) User programming on Floppy disk
The PC Supervisor software to be installed first and it is supplied on 3,5” floppy disks.
NOTE:
a) It is recommended to make a backup of the original floppy disks prior to installation.
b) Selection and processing of windows and displays follows the usual instructions according to the
WINDOWS manual.
c) To avoid bringing in a computer virus it is not allowed to run computer games generally and to
use software programs, which are not authorized on the Maintenance Data Terminal (PC). It is
recommended to test the computer or disks with a virus checker.
The disks required to install the "PC supervisor" program are on para B.3 of ANNEX "B" in this volume
NOTE: The disk labeled as "UTIL" is used for the LCSU configuration. (see para. 3.2.2).
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
3-41
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
b) User programming on CDROM (one disk)
To install on PC the programs ODBC, WinSv or Adracs WinSv and WinDME400 is sufficient to insert the
disk supplied, in CDROM drive of the PC and to follow the indications which appear on the screen of the
PC screen. The disk is prepared for the execution in AUTORUN.
For detail to see APPENDIX "B" on this volume
3.6.1
"PC Supervisor" program composition
The procedures of installation on PC and the Windows programs are described in the sections APPENDIX
B, C, D of this volume:
- APPENDIX B User Programs WINDOWS for PC - WINSV SUPERVISION
- APPENDIX C User Programs WINDOWS for PC SUPERVISION WINSV ADRACS
- APPENDIX D User Programs WINDOWS for PC - WINDME400, CONTROL of the EQUIPMENT, DME
415/435
- if the equipment were supplied complete of PC, standard programs necessary, operational system and
user's programs relating to the system beacon, they were already installed on the hard disk by the
manufacturer.
3.6.1.1
Windows SuperVisor (WINSV)
The Windows Supervisor is a software that is able to simultaneously display several sites where one
or more equipments can be installed.
It must be used to control DME, TACAN and NDB equipments when DVOR and ILS are not present
in the system configuration; otherwise you must use Adracs WinSv Windows Supervisor program.
To see the status and to control an equipment, it's also necessary to load its correspondent software
manager (e.g. Windows DME/N Equipment Manager).
Operation and install program: see APPENDIX B - WINSV-32 in this volume
3.6.1.2
WinSv ADRACS Windows Supervisor
The WinSv ADRACS Windows Supervisor has the same function of the Windows Supervisor, but
must be used when in the system configuration DVOR or ILS 400 series nav-aide equipments are
also present.
ADRACS = Automatic Data Recorder And Control System
Operation and install program: see APPENDIX C – WINSv ADRACS SUPERVISOR" in this volume
3.6.1.3
Windows DME/N Equipment Manager - WINDME/N-32
The operating instructions concern the use of the control program of the DME 415/435 equipment.
The program works in a Windows environment and makes it possible to display the information
concerning the DME 415/435 equipment for which control has been acquired through a series of
pull-down menus, typical of Windows applications.
The examples described refer to model DME 435 (1 kW output power), but they are also valid for
model DME 415 (100 W output power).
Operation and use program: see APPENDIX D - WINDME/N-32 "Equipment Manager" in this
volume
3.6.1.4
3-42
MCS programming
Operation and use program: to see the suitable Technical manual MCS
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 -Operation & Use
3.7
Ref. 955 900 031 C
FIRST SWITCHING ON
CAUTION
Make sure that the antenna or adequate dummy loads are correctly connected to antenna
connector. Make sure that inside to equipment the internal dummy load is correctly connected
a) Verify:
• that beacon set-up is as required.
•
that the modules are correctly inserted, connected and secured.
•
that power supply and ground connections to the antenna and to the other equipment connected to
the beacon, if any, are correct.
•
that the calibration of peak power was checked for the operational channel, like procedure in
paragraph 5.3.4 and 5.3.5 of section 5 - MAINTENANCE - in this volume.
b) On module CSB, to insert the M1 jumper, link of activation of the battery of maintenance of memories
RAM
c) Checking of the jumpers positioning on each module, as by tables of section 2 - Installation - in this
volume
d) Check the voltages value of the mains and the battery.
Power the beacon ON by means of the breakers provided on the external electrical switchboard (mains
or external 48vdc or both)
e) The indications on the control and status panel light up.
Press the key LAMP TEST present on the Control panel and to check the lighting of all the LED and the
activation of acoustic alarm (BUZZER)
NOTE: The LCSU has been configured with the necessary programs standard by the manufacturer. If it
is necessary to change or modify the installed configuration to refer at the para 3.2.2 "LCSU
CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE"
- To change from Remote Control to Local Control use key REQUEST RELEASE on the
control and status panel.
Maintenance operation is only necessary when operational values have to be adjusted on the
transmitter or when a maintenance check has to be performed. It is carried out using the
maintenance control unit (PC).
- Acoustic Alarm
- When the SIL key is pressed, the acoustical alarm stops (F4 on PC keyboard).
Since the monitor carries out normal checks of function and accuracy, the operation of the
installation is faultless when the control and status panel indicates NORMAL. If however the
control and status panel shows WARNING or ALARM, a check of the installation via PC is
possible after pressing the REQUEST RELEASE key to change from local to remote control.
f) Open the cabinet front door and check for LED indication as described in paragraph 3.3 and table 3-10:
the LED green OK, LED red off
g) Power the PC on.
h) Load the user programs onto the PC hard disk, if necessary, as described on "Supervisor (WINSV-32)
program Installation" of APPENDIX B or "WIN 32 ADRACS Supervisor" of APPENDIX C in this volume.
NOTE: If the equipment has been supplied with PC included, the necessary enable programs standard
have already been installed on the hard disk by the manufacturer.
i) Select the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION and make sure the different optional parts are correctly selected
in accordance with the current beacon configuration.
j) Restore the beacon automatic control and verify that no warning or alarm message is displayed.
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
3-43
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 3 - Operation & Use
955 900 031 C
k) Perform all diagnostic procedures on the transponder connected to the antenna, wait till they are
over and check for any malfunction message.
l)
Change the transponders over, perform the diagnostic procedures on the second transponder (if
present) and check for any malfunction message at the end of these procedures.
m) Make OFF the equipment while pressing on key EQPT ON/OFF and to check the extinction of the
green LED "NORMAL".
n) Checking the beacon in absence of mains (black-out condition). With related batteries connected to
open the 220Vac line of mains: the functionality of the equipment should not be degraded. To
restore the mains after this test.
o) Switch the equipment in automatic mode
On section 5 "Maintenance" in this volume it describes procedures and suggestions in the event of
damages or faulty persistent operations.
3.8
POWER OFF PROCEDURE
These operations are:
a)
the beacon operation is interrupted and as a result no signal will be radiated by entering the OFF
command in automatic mode or the beacon STBY in Maintenance mode, provided in the main menu. Or
by pressing the BEACON ON/OFF pushbutton, on the Control Panel, after taking control of beacon
operation by means of the EQUIP ON/OFF pushbutton on the same panel.
The indications on the Control Panel are also active after beacon STBY or beacon OFF
NOTE: The power supply of regulated voltage +5V and ±15V are continuously present: the "stand by"
or "Beacon OFF" commands stop the RF signal radiated only and not the low voltages.
b)
All power supply voltages may then be disabled by pressing the two breakers provided on the external
electrical switchboard.
Then switch the PC in OFF by means of the suitable on/off switch.
In this case all power supply voltages are disabled and the indications on the control and status panel,
extinguish.
NOTE: Executing the command: EQUIP ON/OFF from remote control it is possible to switch off the radiated
signal of the beacon on condition that, in local site, the command REQUEST/RELEASE is in remote
position (illuminated indication ENGAGED).
3-44
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
Description, Installation, Operation, Maintenance
Reference: Vol. 1 Code 955 900 031 C
GROUND BEACON
DME 415/435
Technical Manual
VOLUME 1
Equipment description, Installation, Operation, Maintenance and PC user
SECTION 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- Air Systems Division
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 4 - Technical Spec.
955 900 031 C
4-II
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 4 - Technical Spec.
955 900 031 C
Table of CONTENTS
Paragraph
Page
SECTION 4............................................................................................................................................4-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................4-1
4.1
General .............................................................................................................................4-1
4.1.1
Applicable Documents: .....................................................................................................4-1
4.2
ENVIRONMENTAL and SERVICE CONDITIONS ...........................................................4-1
4.3
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS .....................................................................................4-1
4.3.1
Equipment Versions..........................................................................................................4-2
4.4
GENERAL FEATURES and TYPE of SERVICES............................................................4-2
4.4.1
Type of Services ...............................................................................................................4-2
4.4.2
Coverage and Accuracy....................................................................................................4-2
4.4.3
Radio frequency and polarization .....................................................................................4-2
4.4.4
Nominal Reply Delay – Pair Pulse Code – Channeling....................................................4-2
4.4.5
Reply Efficiency ................................................................................................................4-3
4.4.6
Traffic Capacity .................................................................................................................4-3
4.4.7
Reply Delay.......................................................................................................................4-3
4.4.8
Automatic Stabilization of the Reply Delay .......................................................................4-3
4.4.9
Reliability...........................................................................................................................4-4
4.5
EQUIPMENT DATA ..........................................................................................................4-4
4.5.1
TRANSMITTED signal ......................................................................................................4-4
4.5.1.1
Pulse shape ......................................................................................................................4-4
4.5.1.2
RF Pulse Signal Spectrum................................................................................................4-4
4.5.1.3
Out of Band Spurious Output............................................................................................4-5
4.5.1.4
In-Band Spurious Output ..................................................................................................4-5
4.5.1.5
Harmonics.........................................................................................................................4-5
4.5.1.6
Peak Power Output...........................................................................................................4-5
4.5.1.7
Transmitted Pulses ...........................................................................................................4-5
4.5.1.8
Replies to Valid Interrogations..........................................................................................4-5
4.5.1.9
Identification Using Morse Code.......................................................................................4-5
4.5.1.10
Squitter Output Pulses ......................................................................................................4-6
4.5.1.11
Transmission Priority ........................................................................................................4-6
4.5.2
RECEIVER AND PROCESSOR CHARACTERISTICS....................................................4-6
4.5.2.1
Receiver Sensitivity...........................................................................................................4-6
4.5.2.2
Receiver Dynamic Range .................................................................................................4-6
4.5.2.3
Sensitivity Variation with Pulse Coding.............................................................................4-6
4.5.2.4
Sensitivity Variation with Frequency .................................................................................4-6
4.5.2.5
Sensitivity Variation with the Interrogation Load...............................................................4-7
4.5.2.6
Sensitivity Variation due to Interrogations on the Adjacent Channel................................4-7
4.5.2.7
Recovery Time..................................................................................................................4-7
4.5.2.8
Continuous Wave (CW) Signal Interference.....................................................................4-7
4.5.2.9
Spurious Suppression.......................................................................................................4-7
4.5.2.10
Decoding Dead Time ........................................................................................................4-7
4.5.2.11
Echo Suppression.............................................................................................................4-7
4.5.2.12
Receiver Bandwidth ..........................................................................................................4-8
4.5.2.13
Interrogation Overload ......................................................................................................4-8
4.5.2.14
Receiver Inhibition during Transmission...........................................................................4-8
4.6
MONITORING SYSTEM...................................................................................................4-8
4.6.1
General .............................................................................................................................4-8
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
4-a
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 4 - Technical Spec.
955 900 031 C
Paragraph
4.6.2
4.6.2.1
4.6.2.2
4.6.2.3
4.6.3
4.6.4
4.6.4.1
4.6.5
4.6.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.9.1
4.9.2
4.9.3
4.10
4.10.1
4.10.2
Page
Executive Monitoring ........................................................................................................ 4-9
Executive Monitoring Terms............................................................................................. 4-9
Monitor Insertion Delay .................................................................................................... 4-9
Monitor Response to Alarms ............................................................................................ 4-9
Monitor Self-check............................................................................................................ 4-10
Routine Checks ................................................................................................................ 4-11
Monitors Routine Check ................................................................................................... 4-11
Manual tests ..................................................................................................................... 4-11
Diagnostics ....................................................................................................................... 4-12
LOCAL I/O SYSTEM ........................................................................................................ 4-13
Duplexer and RF path ...................................................................................................... 4-13
POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................. 4-14
Consumption: ................................................................................................................... 4-14
Power supply PWS module: +5V and ± 15V.................................................................... 4-15
BCPS subrack and AC/DC module.................................................................................. 4-15
ANTENNA ........................................................................................................................ 4-17
Omnidirectional FAN 96 type ........................................................................................... 4-17
Sectorial FAN-88 .............................................................................................................. 4-18
List of TABLES
Table
Page
Table 4.1 Channel code, pulse code, reply delay................................................................................. 4-3
Table 4.2 DME 415/435: Executive Monitoring .................................................................................... 4-10
4-b
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 4 - Technical Spec.
955 900 031 C
SECTION 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
4.1
GENERAL
Equipment DME 415/435 is a ground beacon located in a subrack of 19", equipped with two transponders
and a system dual monitoring, microprocessor controlled.
This equipment can be also configured like DME/N for 100Wp (DME 415) or 1kWp (DME 435).
The following characteristics are valid for the two configurations if that is not specified differently.
4.1.1
Applicable Documents:
The DME ground beacons comply with the following specifications:
− ICAO Annex 10, 5th edition, International Standard and Recommended Practices
− EUROCAE ground DME, MPS (Minimum Performance Specification), ed.57, Iss. December 1986.
− C E directives for Transceiver ETS 300 339 (EMC)
EN 60065 – EN6215 (Safety)
− EEC Directives for CE marking: EMC/89/336
Electrical Safety/73/23.
4.2
ENVIRONMENTAL AND SERVICE CONDITIONS
The optimal environmental conditions for beacon operation are given below:
− Temperature operation indoor: from −10°C to +55 °C.
− relative humidity: up to 95% (-10 to +35°C); max 60% (> 35°C);
− pressure: from 760 to 500 millimeters of mercury from sea level to an altitude of approximately 3000
meters; if the equipment is to be installed on sites at even greater altitudes, consult the manufacturer.
As regards beacon storage and transport, the temperature must be within the limits −40 °C and +70 °C and
pressure up to 15000 m.
4.3
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
The beacon physical characteristics of the equipment single 19" standard cabinet are as follows:
− height: 1730 mm;
− width: 580 mm;
− depth: 610 mm (cabinet code 297 509 004);
635 mm (cabinet code 297 509 007) ;
− weight: approx. 145 kg DME 415 (optional modules included).
approx. 165 kg DME 435 (optional modules included)
Completely modular with plug-in module type. Plug-in units are used as double or single Euroform printed
multi-layer circuit boards, with dimensions of 233.4 x 220 [mm] or 100 x 220 [mm] accommodate on four
subracks (full version). The RF modules are accurately shielded in casting boxes.
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
4-1
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 4 - Technical Spec.
955 900 031 C
4.3.1
Equipment Versions
The two versions have the same modules and the same of principles of operation.

Approach DME 415 – Solid state 100 Wp to be co-located with ILS

En route DME 435 – Solid state 1kWp to-be co-located with VOR or DVOR
The equipment is configurable in following standard version:
•
Full dual: Two Transponders/monitors/duplexers
•
Single: One transponder/monitor/duplexer
Other possible configurations are available by request
NOTE: Each version of DME can be assembled in cabinet indifferently with code 297 509 004 or
code 297 509 007
4.4
GENERAL FEATURES AND TYPE OF SERVICES
All the features listed below refer to the DME beacon antenna connector where no other indication is given.
4.4.1
Type of Services
This system provides a method of measuring the direct distance between an aircraft and a selected
transponder within the coverage limits dictated by the operational requirements.
Each DME transponder provides synchronous replies to the DME/N interrogation signals.
4.4.2
Coverage and Accuracy
Coverage can be either omnidirectional or sectorial, depending on the type of antenna selected, and is
determined in relation to the following power densities:
On the transponder antenna: –93 dBW/m2 for DME 415; –103 dBW/m2 for DME435,
On the aircraft antenna: –83 dBW/m2 for the DME/N.
At present, the total accuracy of a DME system can be considered within the maximum values specified
below: ±0.12 NM +0.05% of the distance. From 0 to 65 nautical miles, and ±0.17 NM +0.05% of the
distance, above 65 nautical miles.
4.4.3
Radio frequency and polarization
The transponder antenna is vertically polarized and it radiates in the frequency band ranging from 960 MHz
to 1215 MHz. The interrogation and reply frequencies comply with the ICAO Annex 10 standards.
4.4.4
Nominal Reply Delay – Pair Pulse Code – Channeling
The DME 415/435 beacon is configured as DME/N, it will be possible to select one of the 252 (standard
ICAO) N channels (126 X channels and 126 Y channels: see table 1.2 on section 1 in this volume).
Table 4.1 illustrates the channel code, pulse code, reply delay and operating mode of the various channels.
4-2
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 4 - Technical Spec.
955 900 031 C
Table 4.1 Channel code, pulse code, reply delay
NOMINAL
INTERROGATION
PULSE PAIR
SPACING CODE
[µs]
TRANSPONDER
REPLY PULSE PAIR
SPACING CODE
[µs]
TRANSPONDER
NOMINAL
REPLY DELAY
[µs]
12
12.0 ± 0.1
50
36
30.0 ± 0.1
56
CHANNEL
CODE
4.4.5
Reply Efficiency
The Reply Efficiency is better than 70% and internal noise not cause more than 10 pair transmission/s
4.4.6
Traffic Capacity
The DME beacon is always capable of giving distance information to a maximum of 200 interrogating
airborne equipment.
It is however, possible to select two transmissions rates values: ranging from 800 to 4800 ppps or ranging
from 2700 to 4800 ppps.
The difference is given by the minimum number of pulse pairs per second (800 ±50 ppps or 2700 ±90 ppps)
transmitted by the equipment. Even in case of no interrogations from the airborne interrogators; as a result,
the power consumption will be different.
4.4.7
Reply Delay
The reply delay may be defined as the reply interval between an interrogation, in antenna, and the
corresponding reply at the same point.
On a DME/N beacon, the reply delay may be selected in 0.05 µs steps, as follows:
from 35 µs to 75 µs for X channels;
from 50 µs to 75 µs for Y channels.
As far as reply delay accuracy according to interrogation level is concerned:
Interrogation level
from –10 dBm to –79 dBm
from –79 dBm to –89 dBm
from –89 dBm to –91 dBm
4.4.8
delay variation
(average)
± 0,2 µs
± 0,4 µs
± 0,6 µs
distance accuracy
(average typical)
± 30 m
±60 m
±90 m
Automatic Stabilization of the Reply Delay
The reply delay can be automatically adjusted according to the measurements performed by the monitors
and of specific circuits on the transponder (circuits of pilot pulse) that they measure and they adjourn the
precision of the reply delay in continuity with step of 12,5ns.
The average value of the measurements from both monitors is used to modify the reply delay presetting in
steps of 12,5 ns.
The automatic reply delay stabilization will continue even if one of monitors is faulty, if the monitoring logic
set will permitted.
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
4-3
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 4 - Technical Spec.
955 900 031 C
4.4.9
Reliability
In the calculation of the beacon reliability, all alarms of the monitors have been considered primary and the
monitors in "parallel" configuration. So that both monitors must detect an alarm at the same time in order
to trigger a changeover or a beacon shutdown.
The failure rate of the various modules has been calculated in relation to the to MIL-HDBK-217E in Ground
Fixed conditions at an ambient temperature of 20 °C and of 55 °C. The following values have been
calculated:
at 20 °C
at 55 °C
DME 415, dual station:
over 18.000 hrs
over 11.000 hrs
DME 435, dual station:
over 16.000 hrs
over 10.000 hrs
DME 415, single station:
over 9.500 hrs
over 6.000 hrs
DME 435, single station:
over 8.500 hrs
over 5.500 hrs
MTBF
4.5
EQUIPMENT DATA
4.5.1
TRANSMITTED signal
The stability of the transponder radio frequency signal output is better than 0.001 % apart from the nominal
channel frequency.
4.5.1.1
Pulse shape
The characteristics of each pulse transmitted are given below:
rise time: 2.5 µs with a tolerance ranging between –1 µs and +0.5 µs, measured between the points
where the amplitude corresponds to 10% and 90% of the peak value;
duration: 3.5 µs with a tolerance ranging between ±0.5 µs, measured between the points where the
amplitude corresponds to 50% of the peak value;
decay time: never longer than 3.5 µs measured between the points where the amplitude corresponds to
10% and 90% of the peak value;
pulse top: between the points on the leading and trailing edges of the pulse at which the amplitude is
95% of the maximum, the instantaneous amplitude does not fall below 95% of the maximum voltage
amplitude.
4.5.1.2
RF Pulse Signal Spectrum
The pulse spectrum of the modulated signal is such, that during the pulse the output power, contained in a
0.5 MHz band centered to ±0.8 MHz with respect to the nominal channel frequency. It is not greater than 20
mW, while in the same band, centered to ±2 MHz, it is not greater than 0.2 mW.
Any lobe of the spectrum is of lower amplitude than the adjacent lobe, which is closer to the nominal
channel frequency. The power in the frequency bands is the energy that the frequency band contains,
divided by the time of pulse transmission.
The time of pulse transmission is the interval, measured between the points on the rise and decay edges of
the pulse envelope, at 5% of the maximum voltage amplitude
4-4
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 4 - Technical Spec.
4.5.1.3
955 900 031 C
Out of Band Spurious Output
The spurious output is below -40 dBm/kHz at all frequencies between 10 and 1800 MHz, with the exception
of the frequency band between 960 and 1215 MHz.
4.5.1.4
In-Band Spurious Output
The RF output level in the interval between transmission of pulse pairs is at least 80 dB lower than the
maximum power level during the pulses. In addition, between the pulses of each pair, there is an interval of
at least 1.0 µs during which the RF output level and is at least 80 dB lower than the maximum power level of
each pulse. Finally, the CW output signal does never exceed 5 mW.
4.5.1.5 Harmonics
The output power of CW harmonics of the carrier frequency does not exceed -10 dBm. In addition, the peak
of any harmonic of the carrier does not exceed +20 dBm.
4.5.1.6 Peak Power Output
The transponder output power at the peak of each pulse is not less than 100 Wp for DME 415 and not less
than 1kWp for DME 435.
It is possible to reduce this power value to 50 Wp ± 1dB (DME 415) and to about 500 Wp ± 1dB (DME 435),
programmable a step of 1dB.
4.5.1.7 Transmitted Pulses
Only pulse pairs are transmitted. Each transmitted pulse pair is coded accordingly to the operation channel.
The difference between the peak power levels of the pulses of any pulse pair does not exceed 1 dB.
The difference between the peak power levels of the pulses of each pulse pair (squitter or reply) does not
exceed 1 dB.
4.5.1.8
Replies to Valid Interrogations
Replies to valid interrogations have a nominal reply delay for the operating channel, as indicated in table
4.1.
Any differences from the nominal reply delay do not exceed the following values:
- ±0.2 µs BIAS and ±0.2 µs NOISE, on a basis of 95 % for interrogations having any level between -5 and
-81 dBm.
- ±0.4 µs BIAS and ±1 µs NOISE for interrogations having levels between -81 and -91 dBm.
4.5.1.9
Identification Using Morse Code
The identity signal (ID) consists of pulse pairs transmitted at a constant rate of 1350 (±0.2 %) per second
during the key down time express in code Morse international
The characteristics of the identity code transmission rate for the DME transponder are as described below.
The dots have duration of 100...160 ms with a tolerance of ±5 %.
The dashes have duration of three dots.
The interval between the dots and/or the dashes of a character has duration equal to one dot.
The interval between two consecutive characters is not less than three dots.
The maximum duration for the identity code is equal to 64 dots.
The code repetition rate is at least once every 40 s.
The manipulation time with "key down" does not exceed 4 s for each identity group.
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
4-5
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 4 - Technical Spec.
955 900 031 C
4.5.1.10 Squitter Output Pulses
The squitter pulse pairs are automatically generated and controlled to maintain a transponder minimum
transmission rate (replies and squitters) equal to 800 (±50) pulse pairs per second (or 2700±90 pps in case
of pulse transmission ranging from 2700 to 4800 pps).
These pulse pairs are randomly spaced, but their spacing is never less than 200 µs and there is no spacing
in the range from 730 to 750 µs (typical spacing of the identity code).
When the transmission rate is greater than 800 pairs per second (or 2700 pps in the other case), no
squitters are added.
4.5.1.11 Transmission Priority
The transmission of the output signals from the transponder has the following order of priority:
- Identity pulse pairs
- Reply pulse pairs
- Squitter pulse pairs
Transmission priority is established in the following way:
- The identity code inhibits the replies and the squitters as long as the dots and dashes last.
- The decoded pulses inhibit the squitter pulses at the encoder input until the reply is transmitted.
4.5.2
RECEIVER AND PROCESSOR CHARACTERISTICS
The transponder provides the required performance in response to interrogations from the airborne
equipment. The interrogating signals comply with the standards laid down in the ICAO Annex 10 and
EUROCAE MPS.
4.5.2.1 Receiver Sensitivity
When there is no overload, the DME 415 / 435 transponder's sensitivity is typical better than -91 dBm (can
be preset between -76 and -94 dBm via PC keyboard).
The reply efficiency is better than 70%. Under these conditions, the transponder internal noise does not
radiate more than 10 reply transmissions per second.
4.5.2.2 Receiver Dynamic Range
Accuracy is maintained for interrogating signals having levels between receiver sensitivity threshold
selectable values and -5 dBm. The reply efficiency is at least equal to 95%, for a single interrogator with
signal levels of at least 10 dB or more greater than the receiver sensitivity threshold.
4.5.2.3 Sensitivity Variation with Pulse Coding
If the interrogation pulse spacing differs from the nominal spacing value by ±1.0 µs, and there are no further
interrogations, the receiver sensitivity threshold does not decrease by more than 1 dB. Interrogations with a
spacing that differs by more than ±2.0 µs and an interrogating level up to a maximum of -10 dBm are
rejected. Single pulse is not decoded.
4.5.2.4 Sensitivity Variation with Frequency
If there are no other interrogations, the nominal sensitivity threshold value does not decrease by more than
1 dB, when the interrogating signal frequency differs from the nominal value of the operating frequency set
by ± 200 kHz.
4-6
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 4 - Technical Spec.
955 900 031 C
4.5.2.5 Sensitivity Variation with the Interrogation Load
With the echo suppression disabled, and with a decoding dead time of 60 µs, the nominal receiver
sensitivity will not decrease by more than 1 dB, when the number of replies has any value up to a maximum
of 3600 pulse pairs per second.
4.5.2.6 Sensitivity Variation due to Interrogations on the Adjacent Channel
The transponder sensitivity threshold increases by no more than 1 dB in presence of interrogating signals
on the adjacent channel at frequencies of ±900 kHz or more far from the on-channel interrogation frequency
and correctly coded (for the channel in use), at any level up to -10 dBm and at any interrogation rate up to
3600 pairs per second. The transponder does not reply to interrogations on adjacent channels.
4.5.2.7 Recovery Time
The receiver sensitivity will not be reduced by more than 1 dB, when the valid interrogation pairs are
preceded by a single undesired pulse which occurs 8 µs or more before the valid interrogation. The period
between a single undesired pulse and the valid interrogation pair is measured between the 50% points of
the rising edge peak value of the single pulse and the first pulse of the interrogating pair. The single
undesired pulse may have all amplitudes up to a maximum of 60 dB above the receiver sensitivity set. The
above is valid when no echo suppression device is activated.
4.5.2.8 Continuous Wave (CW) Signal Interference
A continuous wave interfering signal on the assigned channel frequency or at any other frequency within the
receiver pass band, with peak power of -100 dBm at the receiver input, does not preclude compliance to
specifications or modify the reply efficiency to interrogations from the value obtained without CW
interference.
4.5.2.9 Spurious Suppression
The signal received at the intermediate frequency (63 MHz) is suppressed by at least 80 dB. Any other
spurious reply or signal in the band between 960 and 1215 MHz and image frequencies are suppressed by
at least 75 dB.
4.5.2.10 Decoding Dead Time
The decoding of each valid pair of interrogation pulses generates a dead time interval during which the
decoder output is disabled, and therefore any subsequent valid interrogations will not be processed and
transmitted, even though they are decoded.
The duration of the dead time interval, which is normally set at 60 µs, can be selected from the range of
values 50 to 150 µs, at 1 µs steps.
4.5.2.11 Echo Suppression
•
Short Echo Suppression
Echo pulses which, occur between the pulses of a valid interrogation pair, will not affect the reply timing
by more than 0.15 µs.
In addition, the reply efficiency will not be reduced by more than 10% with respect to the value obtained,
when there are no echo pulses.
This occurs for an interrogating signal with a level between -10 dBm and 10 dB beyond the sensitivity
threshold set for the receiver, and for an echo level up to 3 dB lower than the direct signal level.
•
Long Echo Suppression
The long echo suppressing circuits are used to suppress the echo pulses, which fall after the dead time
interval.
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
4-7
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 4 - Technical Spec.
955 900 031 C
These circuits are activated after the decoding of a valid interrogation with an interrogating level, which
exceeds the activation threshold of the long echo suppression circuits. The threshold can be selected
from the values between 0 dBm (deactivated echo suppression circuits) and -60 dBm.
The threshold used for long echo suppression has a level, which is 3 (±3) dB above the interrogating
signal level which activated the echo suppression circuits. It has a duration, which can be selected from
the values between 50 and 300 µs.
4.5.2.12 Receiver Bandwidth
The bandwidth at the 12 dB and 60 dB points do not exceed 2 MHz and 12 MHz respectively.
4.5.2.13 Interrogation Overload
The maximum transponder transmission rate is 4800 (±150) pulse pairs per second.
When overload occurs, the sensitivity of the receiver is automatically reduced to limit the transmission rate
of the transponder. The range of sensitivity reduction is 50dB.
The transmission rate is automatically controlled by simple preventing further replies.
The transponder components are additionally protected if transmission should exceed the maximum rate in
case of malfunctioning.
4.5.2.14 Receiver Inhibition during Transmission
During transmission the receiver is inhibited for a period of time that will not exceed 10 µs for each pulse
transmitted.
4.6
4.6.1
MONITORING SYSTEM
General
The typical monitoring system consists of two independent monitors, controlled by µP and managed by
suitable program.
the two monitors have primarily the function to take measurements whose results, provided to the system of
control, make it possible to check the services of the equipment and emitted signal RF. To take various
measurements one uses pulses produced by the interrogators having the same characteristics as the signal
coming from RF interrogator of the airborne.
The monitors basically perform the following measurements in order to check that the beacon is operating
correctly:
a)
Executive monitoring; tests continuously carried out on the transponder output signal.
b)
Monitor self-check; additional tests carried out together with the executive monitoring to ensure the
monitor integrity.
c)
Routine checks; pre-established tests of the most important parameters of the transponder and of the
monitor itself that can be performed during the normal operation of the beacon; they can be repeated
periodically or when requested by the operator.
d)
Manual tests; tests specific for maintenance operations; to perform quantitative measurements on the
relevant parameters while keeping the beacon in normal operation: the operator may select the type
of test.
e)
Diagnostics; tests performed in sequence and when requested by the operator, useful to determine
the efficiency of the monitor itself and of the transponder connected to the dummy load.
4-8
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 4 - Technical Spec.
4.6.2
955 900 031 C
Executive Monitoring
This monitoring action, check the output signal of the transponder(s) and generates a condition of alarm as
specified in this section when the predetermined limits are exceeded.
It is continuously carried out for the main transponder connected to the antenna; it can also be carried out
contemporary both for the transponder on antenna and for the transponder on dummy load if the standby
mode selected is "hot".
The operator is supplied with the values of the controlled parameter measurements obtained by both
monitors. These values are continuously updated.
The tests are performed in approx. 1 s; after a pre-defined delay an out of tolerance parameter generates an
alarm condition and as a result the transponders will be changed over or the equipment will be shutdown.
See details on the measurements in the table 4.2.
It is possible to select a AND or OR monitor logic.
- In case of OR monitor logics, both monitors must work correctly to make beacon operation possible.
An alarm condition will occur (beacon shut down) when one monitor detect an out of tolerance
condition of one parameter.
- In case of AND monitor logics, the beacon will keep working even if one of the two monitors is faulty.
An alarm condition will occur when both monitors detect an out of tolerance condition of one
parameter (AND logic=best reliability condition default preset).
4.6.2.1
Executive Monitoring Terms
•
A primary alarm starts an automatic sequence of events to inhibit signal transmission and
consequently, restore correct operation by inserting the reserve equipment, if present.
•
A secondary alarm starts an automatic sequence of events to provide the proper signaling and
engage the spare transponder if this can provide a better service. A secondary alarm does not inhibit
signal transmission. The measuring period is the interval necessary for acquiring samples of a
parameter.
•
The average value of a parameter is calculated in the measuring period.
•
The reaction time (time monitors alarms delay) is the interval between an out of tolerance condition
occurring and the changeover or shutdown of the transponder by the controller. The reaction time
takes the monitor and equipment delays into account.
4.6.2.2 Monitor Insertion Delay
The monitors are inhibited for approx. 5 s after the "equipment on" command.
4.6.2.3 Monitor Response to Alarms
After primary or secondary alarms the following operations are performed:
•
The transponders are switched or powered off.
•
A visual and acoustic alarm is emitted at both the local and remote sites.
•



The cause of the alarm is identified (monitor parameter), and the value at the time of alarm is stored.
Switching a Single Transponder
If there is no standby equipment available, the single equipment is deactivated only when the monitors
detect a primary parameter, which is outside of the specified limits. A primary alarm completely interrupts
transmission from the station within the given reaction time.
Switching Dual Equipment
When there is a standby equipment available, switching guarantee that service continues with the best
available hardware, including the secondary alarm conditions.
A secondary alarm on the operating transponder causes the equipment to be switched only if the
standby transponder's conditions are perfect.
Standby Mode
The standby mode of the transponder connected to the dummy load can be set to:
- Normal : Transmitter is off.
- Hot
: Transponder is operating.
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
4-9
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 4 - Technical Spec.
955 900 031 C
To table 4-2 are deferred, for each parameter, the alarm threshold, the measuring accuracy, the reaction
time as well as the procedure of measurement. The parameters to which corresponds a secondary alarm
can be redefined individually in way such as the condition of alarm which is associated to them the primary
type
Table 4.2 DME 415/435: Executive Monitoring
PARAMETER
ALARM
TYPE
ALARM
THRESHOLD
TEST
ACCURACY
MONITORS
ALARMS
DELAY
TEST
METHOD
REPLY DELAY
Primary
±0.1 µs
(adjustable at
±0.4 µs max.)
±20 ns
4s
Average of 32 tests obtained by
(adjustable
interrogating with 40 ppps and from 1 to 10s)
40 dBm ±2 dB level
REPLY PULSE
SPACING
Primary
±0.25 µs
±20 ns
4s
(adjustable
from 1 to 10s)
4 tests are averaged every
second
REPLY PULSE
POWER
Primary
−3 dB
±0.5 dB
4s
(adjustable
from 1 to 10s)
4 tests are averaged every
second
TRANSMISSION
FREQUENCY
Primary
±200 ppm
±50 ppm
4s
By means of the counter
TRANSMISSION
RATE
Secondary
(selectable
to primary)
720 ppps
±20 ppps
10 s
By means of the counter
IDENTITY CODE
Secondary
(selectable
to primary)
−
−
−
Enabled alarm if the identity
code unit is delayed by more
than 1 cycle Alarm at 2nd cycle
after the last valid cycle.
REPLY
EFFICIENCY
Secondary
(selectable
to primary)
66%
±2%
10 s
Replies to 50 inter-rogations at
a level 6 dB (±2 dB) greater
than the receiver sensitivity
threshold; updated approx.
every 2.5 s
Note 1:
The secondary alarm parameters can be set individually to operate as primary alarms and the
reaction time for each alarm can be preset between 1 and 10 s.
Note 2: The reply delay alarm limit can be adjusted up to 0.4 s on request of the user.
Note 3: The number of interrogations generated by the monitor system does not exceed 120 per second.
4.6.3
Monitor Self-check
Each monitor is kept under constant control to check its operation in order to avoid false alarm detection.
This is done by performing suitable tests, which are repeated every second. If the monitor fails to pass all
tests, it is declared faulty and deactivated within 1 s.
The following tests are performed:
• Frequency synthesizer
• Interrogator
• IF detector
• AD and DA converters
• Timers and counters
• Morse Code detector
• Digital circuits (µP, RAM, Eprom).
4-10
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 4 - Technical Spec.
4.6.4
955 900 031 C
Routine Checks
A routine check is carried out on request or periodically at intervals, which are preset by the operator. It
performs quantitative measurements of the transponder and monitor parameters; the results can be stored
in the database of the equipment.
These measurements do not affect or delay the normal monitoring and do not alter the beacon's
performance:
- Reply delay at interrogation levels of : -10; -30; -50; -71 dBm, and 3 dB above the sensitivity threshold.
Spacing between the reply pulses.
Pulse peak power
ERP of the 1st and 2nd pulse and peak power droop.
Transmission rate.
Transmitter frequency.
Reply efficiency for interrogation levels at +3; +2; +1 dB; 0 -1; -2; -3 dB in relation to the nominal
sensitivity value.
Rise, duration and decay times of the first pulse transmitted.
Rise, duration and decay times of the second pulse transmitted.
Receiver bandwidth: Reply efficiency at 1 dB over the sensitivity threshold and with a variation in
frequency of ±200 kHz.
Rejection of the adjacent channel: Reply efficiency at an interrogation level of -10 dBm and with a
variation in frequency of ±900 kHz.
Decoder operation: Reply efficiency at an interrogation level of 1 dB above the sensitivity threshold and
with a variation in spacing between the interrogating pulses of ±1 µs; then reply efficiency at an
interrogation level of -10 dBm and variations in the spacing between the interrogating pulses of ±2 µs.
Rejection of the single pulse: Reply efficiency at -10 dBm and with single pulse interrogations.
Recovery time: Reply efficiency at 1 dB above the sensitivity threshold with the previous pulse 9 µs
before and a level of 60 dB above the sensitivity threshold.
Echo suppression, as for operator setting.
Dead time: Reply efficiency to interrogations which occur within the dead time of a previous
interrogation and immediately afterwards.
Identity code: Detected code, dot/space duration, dash/interval duration, identity code repetition speed
and period.
4.6.4.1 Monitors Routine Check
The following operations are performed:
- Interrogation 1st & 2nd pulse level
- Interrogation pulse spacing
- Interrogation 1st & 2nd pulse shape
4.6.5
Manual tests
The tests are carried out individually, when requested by the operator, and they perform quantitative
measurements on the relevant parameters. The normal monitoring of the transponder connected to the
antenna is not interrupted.
The tests are as follows:
- All those indicated above (Routine Checks) which can be preselected individually.
- Variation in the sensitivity with the interrogating load: Reply efficiency with interrogation levels at +3; +2;
+1; 0 –1; -2; -3 dB with respect to the sensitivity value, and with 3600 pulse pairs per second of
interrogations on channel.
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
4-11
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 4 - Technical Spec.
955 900 031 C
Receiver sensitivity with interrogations on the adjacent channel: Reply efficiency with an interrogation
level equal to 1 dB above the sensitivity threshold with 3600 interrogations on the adjacent channels
(±900 kHz from the nominal channel frequency).
Interrogation overload: The transmission rate with 10,000 interrogations.
Variation in the reply efficiency with CW interference: Reply efficiency with an interrogation level equal
to the receiver sensitivity and with an interfering CW signal on the channel at -100 dBm.
4.6.6
Diagnostics
The diagnostic function performs sequentially a series of tests both on the monitor(s) and on the
transponder connected to the dummy load with the purpose of locating the cause of a possible malfunction
and the corresponding (Line Replaceable Unit) LRU(s).
During diagnostic execution, the message DIAGNOSTIC TEST RUNNING is indicated.
At the end DIAGNOSTIC TESTS: ALL OK is indicated.
Otherwise if a failure is detected, the list of failed tests along with the list of modules, which caused the
malfunction, is displayed.
At the end of this list, END DIAGNOSTIC is displayed.
The sequence of tests performed concerns:
- Power supply (check of flags)
- LRU interface addressability
- I/O operation
- Monitor µP operation
- Transponder µP operation
- Frequency synthesizer
- Monitor interrogator circuits
- Monitor measurement circuits
- Receiver and log detector
- Digital Processor
- Pilot pulse operation
- Digital Modulator
- Automatic modulation control
- Transmitter Driver
- RF output signal at the transmitter driver
- Power RF 1 kW amplifier
- RF output signal at the power RF 1 kW amplifier
- Duplexer
4-12
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 4 - Technical Spec.
4.7
955 900 031 C
LOCAL I/O SYSTEM
LCSU
I/O Parallel line:
I/O Serial line:
Input n° 8+8 optocoupled (Ig 0= max 0,5 mA ; Ig 1= max 10mA)
Output n° 8+8 Solid-state relays (max 350V/100mA - insulat. volt. 1,5kV)
Input n° 8+8 optocoupled (optional) (Ig 0= max 0,5 mA ; Ig 1= max 10mA)
Output n° 8+8 Solid-state relays (optional) (max 350V/100mA - insulat. volt.
1,5kV)
No 5 Channel RS232 (port 5,6 equipment internal used)
No 1 Channel RS485/422 (port 4 equipment internal used)
Front panel:
LED indications & membrane push buttons
PC connector Serial line SubD 25 pin, female
I/O Panel
(at top of cabinet)
PC connector Serial line SubD 25 pin, female
Connector Serial line Port 3 SubD 25 pin, male. (Not available if MDM2 is
used)
Connector Serial line Port 2 SubD 25 pin, male. (Not available if MDM1 is
used)
Connector OUT Parallel line SubD 25 pin, female. (16 lines out - standard)
Connector IN Parallel line SubD 25 pin, male. (16 lines input - standard)
Connector OUT Parallel line SubD 25 pin, female. (16 lines out - optional)
Connector IN Parallel line SubD 25 pin, male. (16 lines input - optional)
Connector Pair of Telephone lines SubD 9 pin, male.
INTERFACES
n° 2 connectors SubD 25 pin, female on top of cabinet
(Associated Facility)
I/O optocoupler: IN Ig 0= max 0,5 mA ; Ig 1= max 10mA
OUT Ig max 35V/100mA
MODEM
4.8
Connector SubD 9 pin, male on top of cabinet. - Pair of 2-wire switched or
dedicated line
DUPLEXER AND RF PATH
Coax Relay
Four port transfer type : 28V/ 200mA
VSWR ≤ 1,1
Isolation ≥ 60 dB
RF Patch panel
Vers. D, September 2005
Test external for specific measurement: SMA connectors
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
4-13
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 4 - Technical Spec.
955 900 031 C
4.9
POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
The beacon is powered by the optional BCPS unit located in the lower part of the cabinet.
Beacon power supply characteristics:
♦
Mains AC line:
230 Vac +10/-15%; Frequency 48 to 64 Hz
♦
DC external source:
40 to 60 Vdc
♦
Back up Battery
48V nominal – These batteries are recharged by the BCPS unit at 54 Vdc.
Once they have discharged, the batteries are disconnected
by a optional specific protection breaker which opens at a
minimum nominal voltage of 42 Vdc (depleted)
E.g.: on DME 415 a continuous power supply, from battery of
50 Ah, is > 12 h with functioning of the transmitter with a duty
cycle of 800 ppps. For equipment DME 435, is: >7 h
4.9.1
Consumption:
NOTE: The data given below are valid in full dual version and for equipment with all the modules and
accessories efficient and with an RF output power in antenna connector: DME 415=100 Wp.
DME 435=1kWp
• If the beacon is powered using an external 48 Vdc power source or the back-up battery, typical
consumption values are as follows:
DME 415
115 W typical, with one transponder active and the other on stand-by at 800 ppps
of duty cycle transmitted;
160 W typical, with one transponder active and the other on stand-by a 2700 ppps
of duty cycle transmitted
DME 435
140 W typical, with one transponder active and the other on stand-by at 800 ppps
of duty cycle transmitted;
220 W typical, with one transponder active and the other on stand-by a 2700 ppps
of duty cycle transmitted
•
If the beacon is powered from the mains, typical consumption values are as follows:
DME 415:
145 W typical, with one transponder active and the other on stand-by at 800 ppps
of duty cycle transmitted
170 W typical, with one transponder active and the other on stand-by at 2700 ppps
of duty cycle transmitted
200 W typical, with two transponder active (one on Antenna other on Dummy load)
2700 ppps of duty cycle transmitted
500 W typical, with one transponder active and the other on stand-by at 2700 ppps
of duty cycle transmitted during battery charging at typical value of 5A
Redundancy is such that each AC/DC module serves one transponder. In the case of an AC/DC
module fault, there is sufficient power to supply both transponders at the following operating
conditions:
− beacon with one transponder active and the other on standby, 800 ppps, RF Po = 100 Wp;
− battery charging typical current max. 5 A.
4-14
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 4 - Technical Spec.
DME 435:
955 900 031 C
200 W typical, with one transponder active and the other on stand-by at 800 ppps
of duty cycle transmitted
300 W typical, with one transponder active and the other on stand-by at 2700 ppps
of duty cycle transmitted
400 W typical, with two transponder active (one on Antenna other on Dummy load)
2700 ppps of duty cycle transmitted
700 W typical, with one transponder active and the other on stand-by at 2700 ppps
of duty cycle transmitted during battery charging at typical value of 5A
Redundancy is such that each AC/DC module serves one transponder. In the case of an AC/DC
module fault, there is sufficient power to supply both transponders at the following operating
conditions:
− beacon with one transponder active and the other on standby, 2700 ppps, RF Po = 1kWp;
4.9.2
Power supply PWS module: +5V and ± 15V
Low voltage DC/DC converter for supply the transponder and monitor
Input voltage
38 to 72 Vdc
Regulated outputs
+ 5,1V ± 2% - max. 10A
+15 V ± 3% - max. 1,5A
- 15 V ± 3% - max. 1,5A
Protections (each voltage):
Output
:Over voltage with crow-bar and ESD (electro static discharge) device
:Under voltage
:Short circuit continuous
Input
:Over current (with fuse for each input voltage)
:Over voltage
:Under voltage
:Over temperature
Indications
Led
green ON: Input voltage OK
red ON: Output voltage out of voltage limits
Power Supply Faulty: normal "low", with led red ON go to "high"
+ 5V faulty: normal "low"; go to "high" when 5V is out of voltage limits
one for each output regulated voltage
Test for casual fail
Signals logic
Test point
Push-button Reset
4.9.3
BCPS subrack and AC/DC module
The optional BCPS subrack can house up to four AC/DC modules. In the dual configuration, two plug-in
AC/DC converter optional modules are required. Total power handling: 600 W (n° 1 AC/DC module) to
2400W (n°4 AC/DC modules)
Dimensions:
Height
262 mm (6HU front panel) – housing 220mm
Width
84 TE
Depth
320 mm included output connector
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
4-15
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 4 - Technical Spec.
955 900 031 C
Terminal board:
Mains input (n° 3 terminals)
Battery input ( or external 48 Vdc power supply) : n° 2 terminals
Output 1 "48VBT1" with fuse 10 AT (6,3x32) (n° 2 terminals)
Output 2 "48VBT2" with fuse 10 AT (6,3x32) (n° 2 terminals)
Output S "48VBTS" with fuse 2 AT (6,3x32) (n° 2 terminals)
Ground local network (n°1 terminal)
AC/DC module main characteristics:
•
Rectifier unit with Power factor correction and active parallel load sharing bus function
•
OUTPUT
Nominal voltage
54 Vdc (± 0,2 Vdc)
Adjusting range
± 0,5V ( Adj. potentiometer on AC/DC module front panel)
Nominal current (± 5%)
Short circuit protection
Load regulation
Over voltage protection
10A with current limit ≤17A
static (continuous) and dynamic
0,5 V from 0,5A to 10 A of load
typical 75 V
•
INPUT
Input voltage and freq.
Nominal input current
195 to 264 Vac - frequency 48 to 64 Hz
3,0 A typical @ input voltage 230Vac
Inrush current < 20A
•
Efficiency
> 85%
•
Power Factor
≥ 0,95 – Load range 0,25 to 1 nominal load
•
Fuse
Internal line 10 A M (6,3 x 32) input over current protection
•
Indication led (on front panel)
Green "MODULE OK"– AC/DC module output voltage is OK
Green "MAINS"– Input mains voltage OK
•
Signaling free contacts of floating potential:
"MAINS" closed contact = mains OK
open contact = black out or blow fuse
"AC/DC FAULTY " closed contact = AC/DC module operating
open contact = output voltage of out limits or
battery operating
"BATTERY PRE DEPLETION" closed contact = battery > 46 Vdc
open contact = battery ≤ 46 Vdc
"BATTERY DISCONNECTED" closed contact = battery > 42 Vdc
open contact = battery ≤ 42 Vdc
(this contact is able to driver the
winding of the battery depletion,
optional, breaker)
•
Remote control
ON-OFF – On = TTL level : "0" or open
Off = "1" level
•
Test point
Output voltage on front panel
4-16
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 4 - Technical Spec.
•
955 900 031 C
Dimensions:
Height
262 mm (6HU front panel) – housing 220mm
Width
106 mm (21 TU)
Depth
285 mm included output connector
Weight
approx. 4,5 kg
•
Protection class
IP20
•
Connectors (in/out)
DIN 41612 H15
4.10 ANTENNA
4.10.1 Omnidirectional FAN 96 type
Mechanical Characteristics
Wind pressure
• Turn-over moment at base
• Environmental conditions:
- Temperature
- Humidity
•
Obstruction lights
between -40 and +60 °C
up to 100% with heavy rain not < 400
mm/Hg
Siemens 5NQ3208-0A type or
equivalent
90
3050
•
Obstructions light
32 kg max.
See figure
Fiberglass tube
150 km/h with 12 mm of ice; safety
factor not < 2
40 kp max. (equal to 150 km/h with
12 mm of ice)
70 mkp max.
~350
Weight
Dimensions
Protection
Max. bearable wind speed
2200
•
•
•
•
DME Antenna FAN 96
300
Electrical Characteristics
•
•
•
Frequency range
Polarization
Input impedance
V.S.W.R
Gain
Horizontal lobe
Circularity
Vertical lobe
Lobe width of antenna
radiation in the plane
Input RF Power
960 to 1215 MHz
Vertical
50 ohm, unbalanced
Less than 1.8 measured at the antenna input.
≥ 9 dB referred to isotropic source
Omnidirectional
≥ ±1.5 dB
max. radiation at 4° (±1°) above horizon
≥ 6°
Decoupling of the antenna
monitor probes
21,5±3 dB (flatness and stability: ±0.25 dB)
Vers. D, September 2005
220
200
•
•
•
•
•
•
60.5 max
5 kWp, modulated and transmission cycle not
greater than 5 %
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
4-17
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 4 - Technical Spec.
955 900 031 C
4.10.2 Sectorial FAN-88
Mechanical Characteristics
DME SECTORIAL ANTENNA FAN 88
•
Type
FAN-88, directional antenna
•
Net weight
12 kg
•
•
Dimensions
Max exposed
area
See figure
0.38 m
•
Lateral thrust
60 kp at 160 km/h = 100 mph
•
Wind velocity
rated (1.65 safety factor)*/survival
(*based on the yield point)
•
w/o ice
280 km/h / 360 km/h
•
1/2" radial ice
250 km/h / 330 km/h
•
Packing
142 x 36 x 25 cm
•
Temperature
range
(environment)
-30° to +60° C
Lightning
protection
The antenna is DC grounded by a
cross-section of 640 mm2 hot dip
galvanized steel.
•
1306
150
Electrical Characteristics
•
Frequency range
960 – 1215 MHz
•
Bandwidth
255 MHz
•
V.S.W.R.
<1.6 at antenna input
•
Coupling attenuation
25 ±3 dB (antenna / monitor
probes)
•
Beam tilt
+4° ±0.5°
•
RF peak power
10 kWp; duty cycle 2 %
•
Polarization
Vertical
•
Horizontal lobe
66° (3 dB width, at mid band)
•
Vertical lobe
13° (3 dB width, at mid band)
•
Gain (ref. to half wave
dipole)
14 dB (in main lobe direction, at
mid band)
•
Input (antenna and
monitor probes)
50 ohms; Type N female
connector
4-18
256
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
Description, Installation, Operation, Maintenance
Reference: Vol. 1 Code 955 900 031 C
GROUND BEACON
DME 415/435
Technical Manual
VOLUME 1
Equipment description, Installation, Operation, Maintenance and PC user
SECTION 5
MAINTENANCE and
TROUBLESHOOTING
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- Air Systems Division
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
5-II
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
Table of CONTENTS
Paragraph
Page
SECTION 5............................................................................................................................................5-1
MAINTENANCE and TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................................................5-1
5.1
GENERAL.........................................................................................................................5-1
5.1.1
Standards and Tolerances................................................................................................5-2
5.1.2
Documentation of Flight Test............................................................................................5-2
5.2
MAINTENANCE................................................................................................................5-3
5.2.1
Periodic MAINTENANCE..................................................................................................5-3
5.2.2
Routine Tests....................................................................................................................5-3
5.2.3
Monitor Operation .............................................................................................................5-4
5.2.3.1
Single System Test ...........................................................................................................5-4
5.2.3.2
Dual System Test..............................................................................................................5-4
5.2.1.1
Standby Operation Test ....................................................................................................5-5
5.2.4
General Ordinary maintenance.........................................................................................5-6
5.2.4.1
Cleaning............................................................................................................................5-6
5.2.4.2
Other checks.....................................................................................................................5-6
5.2.4.3
Antenna Installation inspection .........................................................................................5-6
5.2.5
Maintenance operation procedures using external instruments .......................................5-7
5.2.5.1
Necessary tools and instruments......................................................................................5-7
5.2.5.2
Output Power measurement.............................................................................................5-7
5.2.5.2.1
On Dummy-Load procedure .............................................................................................5-7
5.2.5.2.2
On antenna procedure ......................................................................................................5-8
5.2.5.3
Pulse shape, pulse spacing and Reply Delay ..................................................................5-9
5.2.5.4
Transponder Frequency Measurement ............................................................................5-10
5.2.5.5
Pulse Spectrum.................................................................................................................5-10
5.2.5.6
Transmission rate .............................................................................................................5-11
5.2.5.7
Monitor Interrogation - Pulse shape, pulse spacing and peak pulse level .......................5-11
5.2.5.8
Power Supply Measurements...........................................................................................5-12
5.2.5.9
Verification with Diagnostic Function ................................................................................5-12
5.3
TROUBLESHOOTING......................................................................................................5-12
5.3.1
Useful Information for Troubleshooting.............................................................................5-13
5.3.1.1
Protection Devices ............................................................................................................5-14
5.3.2
Troubleshooting Procedures.............................................................................................5-14
5.3.2.1
Diagnostics .......................................................................................................................5-14
5.3.2.1.1
Primary Voltages...............................................................................................................5-14
5.3.2.1.2
Stabilized Power Supplies ................................................................................................5-15
5.3.2.2
I/O System ........................................................................................................................5-15
5.3.3
Modules Replacement Procedures...................................................................................5-16
5.3.3.1
TX Module.........................................................................................................................5-18
5.3.3.2
TKW Module (DME435 only) ............................................................................................5-18
5.3.3.3
DPX Module......................................................................................................................5-18
5.3.3.4
MON and RX modules ......................................................................................................5-18
5.3.3.5
Local Control status Unit - LCSU......................................................................................5-18
5.3.3.5.1
CSB Module......................................................................................................................5-18
5.3.3.5.1.1 Battery replacement..........................................................................................................5-19
5.3.3.5.2
INC Module .......................................................................................................................5-19
5.3.3.6
COAX Relay assembly .....................................................................................................5-19
5.3.3.7
I/O Panel ...........................................................................................................................5-19
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-a
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
Paragraph
Page
5.3.3.8
5.3.4
5.3.4.1
5.3.4.2
5.3.4.2.1
5.3.4.2.2
5.3.4.3
5.3.4.4
5.3.5
5.3.5.1
5.3.5.2
5.3.5.2.1
5.3.5.2.2
5.3.5.3
5.3.5.4
5.3.6
5.3.7
5.3.8
5.3.9
AC/DC Module ................................................................................................................. 5-19
Peak power output Calibration Procedure ....................................................................... 5-20
DME 415 Program ACTIVATION ..................................................................................... 5-21
TX100 Modulation - adjust peak power output for DME 415 ........................................... 5-21
Meaning of the labels and data displayed (TX100).......................................................... 5-22
Modification of reference parameters values ................................................................... 5-22
Notation for the calibration of RF output power of the TX100.......................................... 5-24
Calibration of output RF signal for TX100 ........................................................................ 5-25
TKW 1KW Peak power output Calibration Procedure ..................................................... 5-26
DME 435 1KW Program ACTIVATION ............................................................................ 5-26
TKW 1KW Modulation - adjust peak power output for DME 435 ..................................... 5-26
Meaning of the labels and data displayed (TKW) ............................................................ 5-27
Modification of reference parameters values ................................................................... 5-28
Notation for the calibration of RF output power of the TKW ............................................ 5-29
Calibration of output power RF for TKW .......................................................................... 5-29
Reduced power - Check operation................................................................................... 5-30
Adjustment Power Monitor Reading................................................................................. 5-31
Test Points and Led ......................................................................................................... 5-32
Waveform ......................................................................................................................... 5-32
5-b
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
List of FIGURES
Figure
Figure 5.1. a)
Figure 5.1. b)
Figure 5.2.
Figure 5.3.
Figure 5.4.
Figure 5.5.
Figure 5.6.
Figure 5.7.
Figure 5.8.
Figure 5.9.
Figure 5.10.
Figure 5.11.
Figure 5.12.
Figure 5.13.
Figure 5.14.
Figure 5.15.
Figure 5.16.
Figure 5.17.
Figure 5.18.
Figure 5.19.
Figure 5.20.
Figure 5.21.
Figure 5.22.
Figure 5.23.
Figure 5.24a.
Figure 5.24b.
Figure 5.25.
Figure 5.26
Figure 5.27.
Figure 5.28.
Figure 5.29.
Figure 5.30.
Figure 5.31.
Figure 5.32.
Figure 5.33.
Figure 5.34.
Figure 5.35.
Figure 5.36a).
Figure 5.36b).
Page
Output Power test on antenna procedures - Test set-up (BIRD 4391) .......................5-8
Output Power test on antenna procedures - Test set-up (HP8900) ............................5-9
LCSU - Lateral Side View of PBA's .............................................................................5-18
Test set-up ...................................................................................................................5-20
References initial mask for alignment of 100W peak power output ............................5-21
References Mask with values for Mod Trx (example) .................................................5-21
Modify references values for Mod Trx (example) ........................................................5-23
Waveforms of detection for TX100 ..............................................................................5-24
Waveforms of modulation for TX100 ...........................................................................5-25
Incorrect Gaussian Pulses shape................................................................................5-25
References initial mask for alignment of 1KW peak power output..............................5-26
References mask with values for Mod Tkw (example)................................................5-27
Modify references values for Mod Tkw (example).......................................................5-28
Pulse shape for TX100 drive of TKW (example) .........................................................5-30
Setting Reduced power ...............................................................................................5-30
Screen of correct measurement by Monitor 1 & 2 (Example) .....................................5-31
Screen of configuration for power reading adjustment................................................5-31
PWS outline – Test point and LED ..............................................................................5-32
MON outline – Test point and LED..............................................................................5-32
MON module – Waveform monitor: X mode Interrogation ..........................................5-33
MON module – Waveform monitor self-check: Attenuators check..............................5-34
MON module – Waveform monitor self-check: Y mode Interrogation .........................5-34
MON module – Waveform monitor self-check: CALIBRATION Delay ........................5-35
RX outline – Test point and LED .................................................................................5-35
RX module – LOG N waveform Y mode......................................................................5-35
RX module – LOG N waveform X mode......................................................................5-36
DPR outline – Test point and LED...............................................................................5-36
DPR module – Test point position ...............................................................................5-37
DMD module – Waveform, X mode.............................................................................5-37
DMD outline – Test point and LED ..............................................................................5-37
DMD module – Waveform, Y mode.............................................................................5-38
TX outline – Test point and LED..................................................................................5-38
TX module – Waveform – X mode .............................................................................5-39
TX module – Waveform – Y mode .............................................................................5-39
TKW module outline – Test point and LED .................................................................5-40
CSB Module – Test point position ...............................................................................5-41
ACDC module – Test points and LED outline .............................................................5-42
DME 415 -Typical transmitted spectrum signal ...........................................................5-43
DME 435 -Typical transmitted spectrum signal ...........................................................5-44
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-c
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
List of TABLES
Table
Table 5-1.
Table 5-2.
Table 5-3.
Table 5-4
Table 5-5.
Table 5-6.
Table 5-7.
Table 5-8.
Table 5-9.
Table 5-10.
Table 5-11.
Table 5-12.
Table 5-13.
5-d
Page
Standards and Tolerances .......................................................................................... 5-2
List of fuses ................................................................................................................. 5-14
Procedures check during the modules replacement................................................... 5-17
Tolerance of pulse envelope gaussian ....................................................................... 5-25
Power Supply PWS module - External test points ...................................................... 5-32
Monitors MON module - External test points .............................................................. 5-32
Receivers RX module - External test points ............................................................... 5-35
Digital Processor DPR module - External test points.................................................. 5-36
Digital Modulator DMD module - External test points ................................................. 5-37
Transmitter /driver TX module - External test points................................................... 5-38
RF 1KW Amplifier TKW module (only DME 435) - External test points...................... 5-40
CSB Module Test Points ............................................................................................. 5-41
AC/DC Module Test Points ......................................................................................... 5-42
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
SECTION 5
MAINTENANCE and TROUBLESHOOTING
5.1
GENERAL
This section contains all data required for maintenance of the Model DME 415/435 - Distance-Measuring
Equipment - ground beacons. This section provides standards and tolerances, maintenance requirements,
required test equipment, performance check procedures, information supporting flight check of the station,
alignment and adjustment procedures, fault isolation, module replacement procedures, and technical
performance records for the DME ground station.
Maintenance on the DME beacons is made easier by using a personal computer (PC) based control and
monitoring system. This allows the operator to measure and control the main parameters of the DME
transponder using the PC keyboard and display.
This beacon does not require any particular maintenance operation. It has been conceived, from a
mechanical (plug-in system) as well as from an electrical point of view (use of mainly integrated, solid state
components) paying the greatest attention to the reliability factor. This intrinsic reliability is further enhanced
by the quality control method as per AQAP-1 requirements, as regards to production cycles, structure and
inspection; additionally, all automatically tested modules undergo "burn-in" procedures.
The DME 415/435 has been designed to minimize maintenance requirements using built-in computer
controlled test equipment and digital design techniques. Remote access to the equipment through the
modem interface allows the built-in test equipment (BITE) to be used to assure proper DME operation
without the need to visit the site.
The faulty modules may be detected following the information given in paragraph 5.3. Remove and replace
time is minimized by the use of plug-in assemblies that are easily accessed from the front of the cabinet.
Troubleshooting is made easier by the executive monitoring and test procedures, which perform real-time
Usually, operator, at the local site, does not control the beacon, although its operating conditions may be
checked through the messages displayed on the remote PC. The operator may also detect possible
parameter variations by displaying the information concerning the automatic monitoring cycle (EXECUTIVE
MONITORING), by performing the Routine Check, or by standard or specific measurements in manual tests
(Maintenance mode). Then comparing the results obtained to the previous data.
Faster on-site troubleshooting is possible using light-emitting diodes (LEDs) located on the modules. These
make it possible to detect a module failure by looking for an illuminated red LED on any card in the DME
card-cage. Another important instrument for troubleshooting is the DIAGNOSTIC function, which displays
the name of the faulty module. The diagnostic function is described in paragraph D.3.4.4 ANNEX D.
There are a few activities of normal maintenance, which should be performed in DME 415/435. All the main
parameters are maintained at the preset values throughout the entire life of the system by means of specific
circuits and a microprocessor controlled transponder, so that drift as a result of aging, will not occur. No
parts that are subject to mechanical wear are used. Since, the periodic maintenance intervals can be made
only whenever necessary and the number of measurements restricted to a minimum.
In addition, the radiated signals are checked by high-precision microprocessor controlled monitors. These
prevent faulty signals from being emitted by either switching over to the standby transmitter or shutting down
the system completely. Each monitor is a complete programmable DME instrumentation set in itself (BITE Built In Test Equipment), capable to perform all tests and checks required for routine maintenance and for
automatic diagnostics.
Preventive maintenance activities should be reduced in accordance with local regulations as actual data
proves that the requirements in ICAO 8071 are overly conservative.
Skilled operators and technicians may perform more, accurate measurements using external instruments.
The details about any of these measurements are given in the following paragraphs
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-1
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
5.1.1
Standards and Tolerances
The main standards and tolerances for the 415/435 DME are listed in table 5-1.
Table 5-1.
Standards and Tolerances
Lower
Parameter
Limit
Upper
Limit
Standard
Reference
Paragraph
Assigned at
commissioning
Standard plus 0.2 μs
5.2.2
0.2 μs
Reply coding
Standard minus
0.1 μs
Assigned at
commissioning
Standard plus 0.1 μs
5.2.2
Reply efficiency
66%
95%
...
5.2.2
Transmitter power
-3.0 dB of standard
Assigned at
commissioning
...
5.2.2
Radiated power
-3.0 dB of standard
Assigned at
commissioning
...
5.2.2
Transmitter pulse rate
80 pulse pairs per
second (pp/s)
below minimum
Assigned at
commissioning
800-2700 or 27004800 pps
...
5.2.2
Transmitter pulse rise
time
1,5 μs
2,5 μs
3 μs
5.2.2
Transmitter pulse width
3 μs
3,5 μs
4 μs
5.2.2
Transmitter pulse
decay time
1,5 μs
2,5 μs
3,5 μs
5.2.2
Ident cycle time
25 s
30 s
40 s
5.2.2
Transmitter frequency
- .001%
Nominal channel
frequency
+.001%
5.2.5.4
50 V supply low-power
transmitter (TX)
48 V
50 V
52 V
5.2.5.8
50 V supply high-power
amplifier (TKW) (435
only)
48 V
50V
52 V
5.2.5.8
Bus voltage
52 V
54V
55 V
5.2.5.8
5 V supply
4.75 V
5.00 V
5.25 V
5.2.5.8
15 V supply
14.25 V
15.00 V
15.75 V
5.2.5.8
-15 V supply
-15.75 V
-15.00 V
-14.25 V
5.2.5.8
AC supply
187 VAC
230 VAC
276 VAC
5.2.5.8
Reply delay
5.1.2
Standard minus
Documentation of Flight Test
The data recorded during the flight test establishes the baseline for each DME installation. Documentation
is recorded by the printer connected to the PC or in a file on the PC (the Routine Check is the typical file
used). The data recorded during the commissioning and flight check should be recorded and stored in a
reference file. The same procedure should be followed when performing further checks, so the data
recorded can be compared with the original flight check data.
5-2
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
5.2
MAINTENANCE
5.2.1
Periodic MAINTENANCE
955 900 031 C
The procedure is performed using the monitors BITE as measurement instruments.
Each parameter of the transponder in antenna is measured in real time by the monitor(s), which incorporate
a full measuring devices (BITE = Built In Test Equipment). These instruments are constantly verified by its
own self-check (integrity check of monitor) and the possible failure will be visualized through proper failure
messages and the faulty monitor will be switched off.
The frequency of this test might be reduced according to operator's requirements, to environmental
conditions and to the practical experience collected over time. Several customers suggest a periodicity of
once every two years.
Every parameter to be measured is associated with the corresponding limits according to Annex 10, Doc.
8071 Part III DME ICAO specifications, the standards and tolerances in para. 5.1.1, and manufacturer's in
technical specification data (section 4).
The BITEs are performed using a local or remote PC.
paragraphs:
General information is given in the following
− the parameters measured with the EXECUTIVE MONITORING and ROUTINE CHECK programs may
also be measured using the CHECKS menu;
− in addition to the standard tests, the skilled operator may use the PRESETTABLE tests (ANCILLARY see ANNEX D section) to create special tests, not provided by the system, necessary to perform
particular checks
− before starting every ordinary maintenance procedure, it is necessary to analyze any possible alarm or
warning condition which may have occurred from the last maintenance intervention so as to perform
more accurate controls on the parameters showing signs of degradation;
− at the end of the maintenance procedures, print the last Routine Check and the data relating to every
measurement performed; compare them to the previous data and to the data obtained upon installation.
− these controls must be performed on both transponders and it is advisable to perform a final control on
the two of them using the diagnostic function (DIAGNOSTIC TEST).
Therefore, the equipment does not require typical scheduled maintenance. Only ordinary cleaning
maintenance is suggested.
For shelter, air conditioner and emergency battery (if applicable), observe, the manufacturers maintenance
recommendations. Battery type suggested: low maintenance or sealed type.
Additional external measurements are documented in paragraph 5.2.5. These allow the operator to test the
validity of the measuring devices inside the monitor by means of external instruments. These procedures
may be used at the discretion of the maintenance technician.
5.2.2
Routine Tests
Routine tests will verify the proper performance of the DME transponder and monitor. This performance test
should be run at discretion of operator. All limits should conform to the tolerances in table 5-1 or those
dictated by local regulations. All tests must pass.
If any tests fail, repeat the tests two or three times to verify the failure; then refer to paragraph 5.3 for
troubleshooting assistance.
a.
For this procedure, data will be printed or saved to disk. If a printer is to be used it must be
connected. If the data is to be saved to a disk, use the save to a file option that is available when
the printer screen appears.
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-3
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Connect the PC to the DME. This may be done locally or remotely through telephone lines.
Log on.
Request control of the DME.
Select Checks and then "Executive monitoring on antenna" and "Monitor self check".
Select Abort to freeze the data.
Print the displayed data or save to a file. Exit screen.
Select Checks and then Routine check - Trx on Antenna. Wait for the tests to complete (tests will
take few minutes). When the “END ROUTINE CHECK” box appears, press RETURN or click on
OK. Review and confirm all data is within tolerances.
Print the displayed data or save to a file. Exit screen.
Select Checks and then Routine Check- On Monitor. Wait for the tests to complete (tests will take
several minutes). When the “END ROUTINE CHECK” box appears, press RETURN or click on
OK. Review and confirm all data is within tolerances.
Print the displayed data or save to a file. Exit screen.
The following may be done to document the setup of the equipment.
a.
Select Settings and then Transponder Parameters.
b.
Print the displayed data or save to a file. Exit screen.
c.
Select Settings and then Operational Parameters.
d.
Print the displayed data or save to a file. Exit screen.
e.
Select Settings and then Monitor Thresholds.
f.
Print the displayed data or save to a file. Exit screen.
g.
Select Settings and then Restart delay.
h.
Print the displayed data or save to a file. Exit screen.
i.
Log off.
5.2.3
Monitor Operation
This test verifies that the monitor will alarm and that a transfer (dual system) or shutdown (single system)
will occur if a parameter is out of tolerance. This test will take the system off the air in automatic mode
operation.
5.2.3.1
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5.2.3.2
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
5-4
Single System Test
Remove the monitor one coax. cable at the top of the cabinet. This will cause the transmission
rate and radiated power parameters to alarm.
Verify the system shuts down by looking at the front panel indications.
Verify there are no green LEDs illuminated on the transmitter assembly (TX). This confirms the
transmitter is off.
Replace the monitor one cable.
Restore the system to normal operation using the front panel.
Dual System Test
Remove the monitor one coax. cable at the top of the cabinet. This will cause the transmission
rate and radiated power parameters to alarm on monitor one.
Remove the monitor two coax. cable at the top of the cabinet.
Verify the system transfers to transponder 2 by looking at the front panel indications.
Verify there are no green LEDs illuminated on the transmitter one assembly (TX). This confirms
the transmitter is off.
Verify transponder two shuts down by looking at the front panel indications.
Verify there are not green LEDs illuminated on the transmitter two assembly (TX). This confirms
the transmitter is off.
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
g.
h.
955 900 031 C
Replace the monitor one and two cables.
Restore the system to normal operation using the front panel.
5.2.1.1
Standby Operation Test
These procedures provide for checking the station batteries (if is not used the sealed type) and correcting
any deficiencies that may be found. These procedures should be performed to observing the periodic
maintenance of the manufacturers recommendations.
WARNING
Batteries, generate an explosive gas under normal operating
conditions if is not used the sealed type.
Special care should be taken to avoid creating sparks that could ignite
this gas.
Ensure no tools or other metal objects can fall onto the batteries or
otherwise contact the batteries and cause a short.
Batteries contain a very corrosive electrolyte that can cause serious
injury to the skin and eyes.
Wear proper protective clothing and eye, hand, and face protection
when working with the batteries.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Visually inspect each battery and verify it is free of any bulges, cracks, or other deformations.
Replace any defective batteries.
Check all battery terminal connections and verify they are tight and free of corrosion.
Check that batteries are clean and free of corrosion. If necessary, remove dust or dirt by wiping
with a water moistened cloth. If battery electrolyte is present on the outer surfaces of the batteries,
neutralize it with a solution made up of 1/2-pound baking soda in 1 quart of water (0.22-kilograms
soda/liter water). Initially, this solution will bubble. The electrolyte is neutralized when bubbling no
longer occurs when fresh solution is applied. When electrolyte is neutralized, wipe battery clean
with a water moistened cloth. Dry battery with a dry clean cloth.
Using a digital multimeter or equivalent, measure voltage across all batteries. This voltage should
be approximately 54 volts DC. Record this voltage.
Divide the voltage recorded in step "d." by 4 and record this voltage.
Measure and record voltage across each battery. The voltage across each battery should be the
voltage recorded in step "e" ± 0.2 volt DC.
Turn off the AC power and record the time.
Five minutes after performing step "g", measure and record voltage across battery supply.
Twenty minutes after performing step "g", measure and record voltage across battery supply. This
voltage should be no less than 0.2 volt DC less than the voltage recorded in step "h". If battery
supply fails this check, measure and record voltage across each battery. If voltage across one
battery is 0.5 volt DC or more below voltage recorded in step "e", replace that battery. Charge the
battery and repeat steps "d" through "i". If the voltage across two or more batteries is 0.5 volt DC
or more below voltage recorded in step "e", charge battery supply and repeat steps "d" through "i".
Turn on the AC power.
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-5
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
5.2.4
General Ordinary maintenance
WARNING
To avoid an electrical shock hazard, verify that the equipment is
powered down before attempting any general maintenance work.
5.2.4.1
Cleaning
Clean the outside and inside of shelter if necessary.
Clean the inside and outside of the equipment cabinet when become necessary.
Avoid transferring dirt on DME cabinet during the cleaning: use always a vacuum cleaner.
CAUTION
Cleaning aids, such as brushes and dusters, must be made of anti-static
material. Use only a soft cloth; do not use corrosive and abrasive
substances.
The local control and status unit (LCSU) front panel, may be damaged by
some types of chemicals used for cleaning. To remove layers of dirt on
the LCSU panel, use ethyl alcohol, glycol, or clean water. Moisten a cloth
with one of the liquids mentioned above and remove dirt.
Dusting of the subassemblies should only take place in conjunction with removal of a subassembly when
this becomes necessary. Even then, subassemblies should only be dusted if dust can be detected by
means of a visual check. They should always be dusted using a soft brush, and if possible with the aid of a
vacuum cleaner. During such operations, it is essential to observe all precautionary measures for voltagesensitive semiconductors.
5.2.4.2
5.2.4.3
Other checks
•
Inspect all components to ensure that there is no damage, corrosion, or evidence of
overheating.
•
Verify that all components are securely mounted.
•
Verify that all electrical connections are secure.
Antenna Installation inspection
Inspect complete antenna mast installation, coax and connectors of antenna cables, line and obstruction
lights for any damage caused by corrosion, rodents, termites, or others. The periodicity of inspections
depends of environmental conditions of the site.
Tight fitting of all RF cable connections (internal and external)
5-6
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
5.2.5
955 900 031 C
Maintenance operation procedures using external instruments
This paragraph gives a simple and concise description of the main procedure, which may be performed by
operators and skilled technicians using the external additional measurement instrumentation on site.
These paragraphs describe procedures to externally verify some of the important measurements made
using test equipment built in to the DME. These procedures are normally not required but can be used at
the discretion of the maintenance technician.
NOTE: If during maintenance operations it is necessary to stop the irradiated signal, the responsible
authorities (e.g. ATC/Controls) must be informed before commencing any maintenance work in
accordance with national regulations.
5.2.5.1
Necessary tools and instruments
This is a list of test equipment required for site level maintenance on the DME. Equivalent test equipment
may be used. Common tools such, as screwdrivers, pliers, and wrenches. A 5/16-inch, 5-inch-pound
torque wrench is recommended for tightening the SMA cable connector nuts.
In addition to the material supplied with the beacon (tool kit and extender board), the following measuring
instruments are required:
- Personal Computer, if missing at local site (Lap/palm top or STD PC), cables connection, startup disk,
printer, adapter connectors
- Oscilloscope dual/four vertical channels ,100 MHz BW, type (Tek 2235A or PM3050)
Multimeter (input 1 MΩ impedance )
Peak Power METER (HP 8900) with probe 1 W f.s. and a series of precision attenuators (± 0,1 dB) 10
dB/5W, 20dB/1W, 30dB/1W (or directional coupler)
or kit: BIRD wattmeter (digital RF mod 4391 with elements: 1000J,250J,100j,25J)
Timer-Counter up to 2 GHz (Hp 5315A-H10-003, Tek CMC251)
Spectrum Analyzer up to 2 GHz (if necessary: see note in para 5.2.5.5.)
5.2.5.2
Output Power measurement
The detailed procedure of alignment and checking of the TX100 and TKW modules RF output power are
described to paragraph 5.3.4 with a specific "DME400 E2prom TX/TKW" program
5.2.5.2.1
On Dummy-Load procedure
NOTE: This test will take the system no stop during the test
a) Perform the EXECUTIVE MONITORING or Routine Check at Peak Power Output measurement on TRX
in Dummy Load (Maintenance Environment)
b) Verify and record the peak power value
c) Switch OFF the TRX on dummy load and take the place of the 50 Ω dummy load by the probe of the
wattmeter, via 30dB precision attenuator (DME415) or 40dB precision attenuator (DME435).
CAUTION
Do not set the beacon to OPERATING when the antenna or
dummy load is not connected.
d) Set the beacon to operating and read the value by the instrument
e) Verify that the value read is equal to the value recorded by internal monitor (s) (±10%)
f)
At the end of the measurements, take note of the values concerning both transponders and restore the
initial connections
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-7
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
5.2.5.2.2
On antenna procedure
NOTE: This test will take the system off the air during the connection of the instruments
a)
Connect test equipment as shown in figure 5.1. a) for the type of power meter that will be used, for the
Bird-type peak power meter set up and figure 5.1. b) for the HP-type peak power meter set up.
b)
Perform the EXECUTIVE MONITORING or Routine Check at Peak Power Output measurement on
TRX (Maintenance Environment)
c)
Verify and record the peak power value
d)
Switch OFF the beacon.
CAUTION
Do not set the beacon to OPERATING when the antenna or dummy
load is not connected.
e) Set the transponder to be measured to operating and read the value by the instrument
f)
Verify that the value read is equal to the value recorded by internal monitor (s) (±20%)
g) At the end of the measurements, take note of the values concerning both transponders and restore the
initial connections.
to ANTENNA
PEAK POWER
METER
(BIRD Model 4391 type)
Heliax
1/2" cable
Plug-in
ELEMENTS
Use with TWO Plug-In ELEMENTS
as appropriate:
FORWARD HIGH Power - 1000J
REVERSE LOW Power - 100J
FORWARD LOW Power - 250J
REVERSE LOW Power - 25J
Antenna connector
Cable assembly, RF, 30 cm
RG214 - N male
DME 415/435
Figure 5.1. a) Output Power test on antenna procedures - Test set-up (BIRD 4391)
5-8
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
to ANTENNA
20 dB Directional Coupler
Heliax
1/2" cable
Combined attenuation
directional coupler-Attenuator
shall be 60 dB for 1 KWp
and 50db for 100Wp
Power meter
PROBE
Cable assembly, RF, 30 cm
RG214 - N male
Antenna connector
PEAK POWER
METER
(HP 8900)
DME 415/435
Figure 5.1. b) Output Power test on antenna procedures - Test set-up (HP8900)
5.2.5.3
Pulse shape, pulse spacing and Reply Delay
This procedure allows the operator to measure the pulse shape and pulse spacing of the transmitter output.
The operator can also measure the system reply delay. The procedure uses a dual channel oscilloscope.
This method is not as accurate as the technique used in the monitor. The results obtained using the scope
will typically be with ±5 percent of the readings displayed by the monitor.
Oscilloscope connections:
• Channel one is connected to monitor test point AN34. See figure 5.23
• Channel two is connected to transmitter test point AN7 (TX100-DME 415) or "AN 7 RF detected" (TKW
- DME 435). See figure: 5.30 (DME 415), 5.33 (DME 435)
• The external trigger input of the oscilloscope is connected to monitor test point AN2 (or AN72). See
figure 5.16.
• Adjust the time base and trigger to allow the interrogations on channel one and the replies on channel
two to be displayed on the screen.
a.
Rise Time. Examine the pulses on channel two of the oscilloscope. Set the oscilloscope time
base to 1 or 2 μs. To measure the rise time, measure the time for the leading edge of the pulse to
transition from 10 percent of its peak value to 90 percent of its peak value. Record this time.
b.
Duration. Examine the pulses on channel two of the oscilloscope. Set the oscilloscope time base
to 1 or 2 μs. To measure the duration, measure the time between the 50 percent point of a pulse
rise time and the 50 percent point of the pulse fall time. Record this time.
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-9
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
c.
Decay Time. Examine the pulses on channel two of the oscilloscope. Set the oscilloscope time
base to 1 or 2 μs. To measure the fall time, measure the time for the trailing edge of the pulse to
transition from 90 percent of its peak value to 10 percent of its peak value. Record this time.
d.
Pulse Spacing. Examine a pulse pair on channel two of the oscilloscope. To measure accurately
the pulse spacing, measure the time between the 50 percent point of the pulse rise time of the first
pulse and the 50 percent point of the pulse rise time of the second pulse. Record this time.
e.
Verify that the values read on the scope are equal (± 2 percent) to the values measured by
monitors (on test of executive monitoring or routine check).
f.
Reply Delay. Channel one shows the interrogation pulses. Channel 2 shows the transmitter
pulses. Set the oscilloscope time base to 10 μs. Measure, accurately, the time from the 50
percent point of the leading edge of the first constituent pulse of the first pulse pair on channel
one, to the 50 percent point of the leading edge of the first constituent pulse of the first pulse pair
on channel two.
Other method of measure, of the replay delay, is that shown in figure 5.19.
g.
5.2.5.4
Verify that the values read on scope are equal (± 1 percent) to the values measured by monitors
(on test of executive monitoring or routine check).
Transponder Frequency Measurement
This procedure measures the DME transponder frequency. The frequency source used by the transmitter
and receiver is located in the receiver module.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
5.2.5.5
Connect PC to DME front panel RS-232 connector.
Log on. Use Commands to turn beacon one off.
Remove the low-power transmitter module (TX). The module may be removed with power on.
Connect frequency counter to the upper RF connector that interfaces with the removed transmitter
assembly. Use the BNC female to backplane female adapter to convert the top connector to a
BNC female connector. This will allow a cable with BNC male connectors on both ends to be used
with the frequency counter.
Frequency counter should indicate station assigned carrier frequency ±0.001 percent.
Disconnect adapter, cable, and frequency counter.
Replace transmitter.
For a dual system, use Commands to turn beacon two off. Repeat steps c through g with the
second transmitter.
Replace the transmitter(s). Restore the system to normal operation.
Log off.
Pulse Spectrum
NOTE
This procedure is significant for sites where beacons or other radio
equipment are installed within a radius of 5 NM (Nautical Miles) and
have adjacent channel frequencies. Therefore, it is not necessary if
these conditions are not present.
5-10
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
Procedure:
a. Using a 40 dB attenuator for DME 435 and 30 dB for DME 415, connect the spectrum analyzer to the
coaxial cable, coming from one of the two antenna probes. First, disconnect the cable from its
connector on top of the equipment cabinet.
b. Use a 30 to 100 kHz/div band width and select the beacon frequency for the spectrum analyzer.
Position the spectrum lines on the raster center of the instrument display and adjust the signal peak
level so that it touches the first top line of the raster.
c. Verify that with FREQUENCY SPAN equal to 0.5 MHz/div, all the spectrum lines at a frequency
greater than the beacon frequency ±2 MHz are attenuated of at least 65 dB for DME 435 and 58 dB
for DME 415 with respect to the beacon frequency peak level, at raster center.
d. Verify that with FREQUENCY SPAN equal to 0.2 MHz/div, all the spectrum lines at a frequency
greater than the beacon frequency ±0.8 MHz are attenuated of at least 47 dB for DME 435 and 40 dB
for DME 415 with respect to the beacon frequency peak level, at raster center.
e. At the end of the measurements, take note of the values concerning both transponders and restore
the initial connections.
5.2.5.6
Transmission rate
a)
Perform the executive monitoring cycle and/or the Routine Check and/or TRANSMISSION RATE
manual test.
b)
Verify that the obtained value comes within the limits indicated.
c)
Connect the frequency counter to AN7 test points of transmitter TX module. See figure 5.30.
d)
Set the counter to read the frequency values in the low frequency range (<100 kHz and high input
impedance) and to count the pulses. Because of the random nature of DME output pulses, the
frequency counter will not display a constant value. The reading will be affected by aircraft
interrogations. Do not use a value measured during a DME identification period. The counter
reading will increase during the DME identification period. Divide the frequency counter reading by
two to obtain the frequency of pulse pairs (as read by the monitor).
e)
Read the value given by the instrument and verify the reading (divided by two) is within the indicated
tolerance limits.
NOTE
The actual ppps number depends on the transmission rate selected
and on the number of interrogating aircraft at the instant the
measurement is made.
5.2.5.7
Monitor Interrogation - Pulse shape, pulse spacing and peak pulse level
The external trigger input of the oscilloscope is connected to monitor test point AN2. See figure 5.16
Connect the probes of oscilloscope on test point AN34 "Out MUX" of the MON module and record:
− Rise time
− Duration
− Decay time
− Pulse spacing
− Peak pulse level
Verify that the values read on scope are equal (± 2%) to the values measured by monitors (on test of
executive monitoring or routine check)
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-11
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
5.2.5.8
Power Supply Measurements
This test measures the key power supply voltages in the 415 DME.
a. Measure the +5 volt (nominal value: 5,1V), +15 volt, and –15 volt levels using the test points on the
PWS module. See figure 5.17 for the test points location. See table 5-1 for tolerances. For a dual
system, perform measurement on both PWS modules.
b. Measure the AC input voltage. The voltage should be measured at the terminal where AC power
comes into the cabinet.
WARNING
Dangerous voltage (240 V AC) exists within the DME system (only on
subrack BCPS unit). Contact with this voltage can cause personnel
injury or death.
c.
d.
e.
5.2.5.9
Measure the DC bus voltage. This can be done at the top, left (front) corner of each transponder
card cage backplane. This point is labeled +48. The point to be measured has a red wire. Chassis
ground can be used as a reference.
The DC bus voltage can also be measured using the + and – test points on the AC/DC module.
See figure 5.35.
Measure the output of the DC/DC converter on the low-power transmitter module (TX). See figure
5.30 (AN 17) for the test point location. See table 5-1 for tolerances. For a dual system, perform
measurement on both TX modules.
Measure the output of the DC/DC converter on the 1000 watt transmitter module (TKW). See figure
5.33 (AN 1 DC/DC Out) for the test point location. See table 5-1 for tolerances. For a dual system,
perform measurement on both TKW modules.
Verification with Diagnostic Function
The Diagnostic is the last operation to be performed and is used to check both transponders.
If this verification and previous inspections and controls confirm the good beacon operating conditions, all
beacon mechanical and electrical components as well as its software can operate correctly. With regard to
the software, it should be noticed that most of its functions have been enabled during the measurements.
To run the Diagnostic software, place the DME in maintenance. Select the Diagnostic test from the Checks
menu. See Annex D for more information.
5.3
TROUBLESHOOTING
This paragraph contains only the information necessary to detect and replace faulty modules, which should
then be repaired at an authorized repair facility.
Troubleshooting is made easier thanks to the built-in testing available in the 415/435 DME.
By looking at the failure messages displayed on the PC video, the operator may easily detect any beacon
malfunction; these messages make it possible to detect the malfunctioning module, if any, and to take the
necessary organization and urgency measures (primary or secondary alarm) so as to repair the module at
the local site. Considering the functional services offered by the beacon, when both transponders are shut
down, it is advisable to first restore one of the two transponders using the redundant and operating modules
of the other one.
5-12
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
The technicians involved in troubleshooting should have a good knowledge of 415/435 theory of operation.
The technician must be familiar with safety measures required to prevent injury to maintenance personnel
and damage to the beacon.
Replace the modules in the sequence indicated by the diagnostics; before every replacement, display all
possible stored alarms or warnings occurred from the last maintenance intervention.
According to the color, the warning lights on the different modules will have the following meanings:
− Green light: normally on, it indicates that the module or circuit being controlled is operating.
− Red light: normally off, it comes on in case of failure of the module.
− Yellow light: normally on, it provides further indications (secondary or partial) about beacon operation.
The same color method is used for the messages displayed on the video: these messages may be seen
only if a color video is used. The WARNINGS, ALARM, SHUT-DOWN and HARD (primary alarm presence
indication) messages are red and flashing so as to be easily seen even on a monochromatic video.
When the beacon is in good operating conditions, no red LED should be on and no red message should
appear on the PC video.
Before replacing a module with a red LED on, it is advisable to reset the module or the beacon since a
transient malfunction might have caused a protection to be activated and therefore the LED to be lit. The
reset pushbutton on the DMD or MON modules can not be used if an initialization is being performed.
Connections made with flat and coaxial cables and to passive, non-plug-in components offer a high
reliability level; they, however, should not be overlooked, but may be checked in conclusion.
WARNING
Proceed with great care when it is necessary to work on BCPS unit
rear part since a 220 Vac dangerous voltage is present.
Radio frequency voltage on RF power amplifier modules output
represent a personnel hazard.
Inside AC/DC modules there are the 220 Vac mains voltage and the
corresponding 300 Vdc rectified voltage whose capacitors may remain
loaded for several seconds after the modules are disconnected. After
removing the modules wait for a few minutes before touching the
internal circuits.
CAUTION
RF loads (antenna cable, 50 Ω loads) should always be connected
when the transponder is set to OPERATING to prevent the RF
components from being damaged.
5.3.1
Useful Information for Troubleshooting
The procedures for the remote site are true for the local site as well, but not vice versa. The remote site is a
center or a control site situated far away from the place where the beacon is installed. The local site is the
place, near the antenna, where the beacon is installed. The two sites may be a few meters or many
kilometers apart.
Remember that the modules should be replaced when the beacon is off/stby condition.
For repairing operations at local site, the following items are required:
− tool kit and spare fuses, supplied with the beacon;
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-13
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
− digital voltmeter;
− spare modules, especially those which are not redundant on the beacon such as LCSU, AFI ;
− IBM compatible Personal Computer (Lap/Palm top) provided with video, keyboard, 3.5" and CDROM disk
drive, cable for connection to the beacon, printer and startup programs disk.
5.3.1.1
Protection Devices
Fuses are employed to protect the BCPS unit and the PWS, TX and TKW (DME435 only) modules; their
features are listed in table 5-2.
Table 5-2.
List of fuses
Module
TYPE OF FUSE
Q.TY
NOTE
BCPS/pcs
10 A type T (6.3 x 32)
2 A type T (6,3 x 32)
Placed on terminal boards of the transponders
48 Vdc power supply line.
They are located on the terminal board
10A type T (6.3 x 32)
2 A type T (6,3 x 32)
Inline Fuse-holders
6 A type T (5 x 20)
48 Vdc line - Placed on PBA of PWS module
TX
3A solder type
48 Vdc line - Placed on PBA of TX module
TKW
6A solder type
48 Vdc line - Placed on PBA of TKW module
BCPS/Frako
PWS
5.3.2
Troubleshooting Procedures
5.3.2.1
Diagnostics
The diagnostics can be run, upon command from the operator (remote or local site), either in automatic
mode or in manual mode to check the efficiency of the transponder connected to the dummy load by
carrying out a sequence of tests. Since both monitors are used for the tests, these monitors and the power
supply modules are checked before all the other modules. Any possible faults are indicated with appropriate
error messages displayed on the video of the PC from which the diagnostics has been activated.
5.3.2.1.1
Primary Voltages
The local or remote operator may obtain only the information relating to the site, where the equipment is
standing. Remember what follows:
The type of power provided to the beacon is clearly indicated on the PC video (POWER:MAINS and
POWER:BATT. messages).
If the mains power fails the beacon will be switched to battery power supply and its operation will not be
interrupted: the POWER:BATT. message will appear on the video.
A protracted mains failure may lead to battery depletion and to a resulting interruption of beacon
operation. 50 A/h batteries standard autonomy is approx. 8 hours; it is therefore advisable to check the
external electrical panel breaker should the mains failure protracts for more than 4 hours.
If both mains and battery power supplies fail, the PC video will be in initialization request message by the
equipment displayed on the PC video.
5-14
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
5.3.2.1.2
955 900 031 C
Stabilized Power Supplies
The operator may obtain only the information relating to the site, local or remote, where he is standing.
Remote Site
A faulty AC/DC module in the BCPS unit is indicated by the relevant warning message AC/DC FAULTY,
on PC monitor .The POWER:BATT. message may be visualized if there is no power from the mains, or
also if both AC/DC modules are faulty.
WARNING
Before removing the housing of AC/DC module waiting for about 1
minute after shoot-down the supply and removing the line connections
Failure of the PWS, TX, TKW modules is indicated by message of warning and may be visualized the
value of regulate voltages.
Local Site
A faulty AC/DC module in the BCPS unit may be detected through the green LED on the front of the
module.
The faulty PWS module may be detected by the corresponding green LED off. In this case, proceed as
follows: reset the module by pushing the appropriate pushbutton, check and if necessary replace the
module fuse and, if the malfunction can not be eliminated, replace the module.
The correct operation of the TX and TKW (DME435 only) module DC/DC converters is indicated by the
corresponding green LEDs, which should be on if the corresponding transponder, is set to OPERATING.
5.3.2.2
I/O System
The parts of the I/O system that could result faulty are listed below, starting with the most probable:
− CSB module in the LCSU unit;
− INC module in the LCSU unit;
− I/O panel (connectors on top of the cabinet);
− interconnecting cables and connectors.
Diagnostics is essentially based on checking the indications provided by the front panel of INC module.
Some of the more common cases are described below.
a.
No indication or command possible
Probably a power failure: check the voltage (+5V) of CSB module. If the measured value is +5V
± 5%, the fault is probably on the CSB or INC board, or the connection cable.
b.
Green OPERATION indicator in LCSU section switches off.
Probable hardware or software fault on CSB board; this condition is also caused by <4.7 V power
supplies.
c.
Yellow WARNING indicator switches on in LCSU section.
A hardware fault in RTC (Real Time Clock) circuit on CSB board.
d.
Red DATA COM indicator switches on in MAIN STATUS section.
Indicates no communication between LCSU unit and the equipment modules. This condition may be
caused by faults in the serial port circuit on CSB board, or the interconnecting cables and
connectors.
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-15
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
Before replacing the CSB board, make these two tests:
a.
Press the LAMP TEST pushbutton located in the LCSU section and verify the indicators are working
properly.
b.
Shut down all the equipment from the control panel then switches on again after a few seconds.
If the fault persists, replace the CSB board since the failure is not caused by a transient fault condition.
The INC board can be indirectly tested through the LAMP TEST. By verifying that the individual indicators
and buzzers are operating and using the control push-buttons, check they are working efficiently.
If the indications and commands are correct on the PC and the corresponding indications are different on
the INC module, there may be an INC board fault or the configuration made is not correct.
The serial and parallel ports I/O can be checked by verifying the ON/OFF levels using the Hardware Test
described in section 3 in this volume; item [3] of the main menu displays the HARDWARE TEST command
that can be used to test all the parallel line inputs and outputs and all the serial channels either separately or
in groups.
Cable or connector faults are unlikely to occur. When they are present, a visual inspection will often indicate
where a cable has been damaged.
5.3.3
Modules Replacement Procedures
a) All the modules may be removed and installed without removing power. The special design of the
connector that supplies power to each module prevents damage to the electronics from occurring.
b) Modules replacement is made easier thanks to the plug-in technique and to the upper and lower
extractors every module. To extract these modules, lift the extractors (push them towards the inside of
the beacon) and pull the module out of its guides. To reconnect the module, reinsert it back in its guides,
push it in and lower the extractors.
c) Several of the modules have jumper switches on their printed circuit boards. It is essential to check that
the switches or jumpers on the new PBA are set to the same positions as on the old module. Section 2
"INSTALLATION" contains the list of the jumpers.
d) Modules with extractors do not require any special operations for their replacement, except for the DPX
and TKW modules, which requires unscrewing the proper front screws and coax. cables disconnection.
e) Outline drawing are shown in this section
f) For other modules, not proved with extractors and requiring particular procedures, proceed as described
below.
g) The specific RF connectors plug-in, situate at the back panel and associated to semi-rigid coax cables,
must be fixed in sure way from the proper nut, by using the spanner of 16 mm. They must have little end
clearance to help the insertion system. On each removed module, to check and regulate manually that
each RF connector on the back panel are under the previously mentioned conditions. The modules
interested at these notes are RX, MON, DPX, TX100 and TKW.
Connectors SMA must be fixed with the torque wrench (1Nm/8.9in-lbs) code 870952302X. You have this
spanner in the tool bag of the equipment.
Connectors "N" of coax cables, must be screwed and blocked in sure way.
NOTES: Check that all the RF cables have been connected correctly before switching the transmitter on
again, and make sure that either the antenna or a dummy load is connected
On some modules are scheduled opportune trimmers that are factory adjusted: they must not be
tampered with, if the maximum precision of system wants to be obtained.
After having replaced the TX100 or/and TKW module it is essential to follow the described
procedures to paragraphs 5.3.5 and 5.3.4 for the respective channel of operation
5-16
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
The following table shows the procedures for to obtain the better performance during the modules
replacement
Table 5-3.
Module
Procedures check during the modules replacement
LED and
TP
Trimmer Procedures check
MON
Fig. 5.18
Tab. 5-6
P6
PWS
Fig. 5.17
Tab. 5-5
Fig. 5.23
Tab. 5-5
TX
Fig. 5.23
Tab. 5-7
P3
TKW
Fig. 5.33
Tab. 5-11
RX
DPX
DPR
Fig. 5.25
Tab. 5-8
DMD
Fig. 5.28
Tab. 5-9
AC/DC
Fig. 5.35
Tab. 5-13
Vers. D, September 2005
To adjust trimmer P6 as para 2.6.4.2.2 "Measurement calibration of the
TRANSMITTED POWER (radiated)" of the section 2 - Installation
On PC to verifier, the parameters from menu CHECK: "Routine check on monitors" and "monitor self check".
Parameters measures must not exceed given limits.
Repeat the check as to para. 5.2.5.8
On PC, to verifier the parameters from menu CHECKS: "Executive
Monitoring" e/o "Routine check" - TRX on Antenna.
Especially verify the following parameters: Transmission frequency,
Adjacent channel rejection, Echo suppression, Reply efficiency, Reply
delay, sensitivity, dead time, Identity Code.
Parameters measures must not exceed given limits.
Fine adjust RF power level for calibration of RF Power out (factory
adjusted)
Repeat the check as to para. 5.2.5.8 for the power supply regulated
voltages
On PC, to verifier the parameters from menu CHECKS: "Executive
Monitoring" e/o "Routine check" - TRX on Antenna.
Especially verify the following parameters: Peak power Out, Pulse shape,
Pulse spacing, Transmitter frequency, Transmitter power, Transmission
rate, Reply delay, Identity code.
Parameters measures must not exceed given limits.
Repeat the check as to para. 5.2.5.8 for the power supply regulated
voltages
On PC, to verifier the parameters from menu CHECKS: "Executive
Monitoring" e/o "Routine check" - TRX on Antenna.
Especially verify the following parameters: Peak power Out, Pulse shape,
Pulse spacing, Transmitter frequency, Transmitter power, Transmission
rate, Reply delay, Identity code.
Parameters measures must not exceed given limits.
On PC, to verifier the parameters from menu CHECKS: "Executive
Monitoring" e/o "Routine check" - TRX on Antenna.
Parameters measures must not exceed given limits.
On PC, to verifier the parameters from menu CHECKS: "Executive
Monitoring" e/o "Routine check" - TRX on Antenna
Parameters measures must not exceed given limits.
On PC, to verifier the parameters from menu CHECKS: "Executive
Monitoring" e/o "Routine check" - TRX on Antenna
Parameters measures must not exceed given limits.
Repeat the check as to para. 5.2.5.8 for the 54V power supply
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-17
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
To replace, proceed as follows:
5.3.3.1
TX Module
NOTE: After having replaced the TX 100 or/and TKW module it is essential to follow the described
procedures to paragraphs 5.3.4 and 5.3.5 for the respective channel of operation
Extract or insert it when the transponder is not set to OPERATING.
Note: During the correct insertion of the modules, to follow the paragraph 5.3.3 g) explanation
5.3.3.2
TKW Module (DME435 only)
NOTE: After having replaced the TX100 or/and TKW module it is essential to follow the described
procedures to paragraphs 5.3.5 and 5.3.4 for the respective channel of operation
Make sure the transponder to which the module is associated is off/stby, then proceed as follows:
a) disconnect the coax cables of the two RF OUT of TKW module and RF IN of DPX module
connectors;
b) loosen the four screws (two on each up and lower side);
c) remove the module by means of two handles knobs.
Note: During the correct insertion of the modules, to follow the paragraph 5.3.3 g) explanation
5.3.3.3
DPX Module
a) disconnect the coax cables of the two RF OUT and RF IN connectors
b) loosen the four screws (two on each up and lower side);
c) remove the module
Note: During the correct insertion of the modules, to follow the paragraph 5.3.3 g) explanation
5.3.3.4
MON and RX modules
Note: During the correct insertion of the modules, to follow the paragraph 5.3.3 g) explanation
5.3.3.5
Local Control status Unit - LCSU
The modules are fastened with screws and screw-threaded supports. The INC board, fastened on the front
metallic plate, supports the CSB board (figure 5.2)
Front panel
INC Module
CSB Module
M22
M32
M53
Figure 5.2.
5.3.3.5.1
LCSU - Lateral Side View of PBA's
CSB Module
From the back of the beacon front door, remove the cable connectors relating to CSB board
NOTE
The M18 power supply connector must always be removed first and inserted last.
The modules must be extracted or inserted keeping them parallel to the front panel
(to avoid connector pins warping)
After replacement of the CSB board, the I/O system has to be reconfigured.
Loosen the ten printed circuit screws; remember that M21/M17 plug-in connector from CSB module is
used for the signal and power supply connections between the CSB and INC modules.
5-18
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
5.3.3.5.1.1 Battery replacement
To back up data in the non-volatile random-access memory (RAM) in case of a voltage drop, the
subassemblies LCSU/CSB contain NI_CD batteries. The battery voltage is checked by the BITE of the
system. The individual batteries are soldered to the PCB. The battery back up function is enabled via
jumpers (M1 of Figure 2.19 section 2)set during first setup or before replacing the respective PCB. Contents
of the RAM will be lost when the jumper is opened which enables battery voltage to the RAM device. Always
observe the label on the battery. The battery has to be replaced by the same battery type.
The presence of dirt or moisture on the board can increase the battery current consumption and decrease
the battery life. It’s also necessary to check that the solder side of the board does not contact the conductive
plane, in order to avoid short-circuits or excessive current consumption.
If replacement of the battery is necessary, attention must be paid to the correct polarity as well as the
electrical characteristics of the new battery (see CSB board layout - component ref.: BAT1).
Replace the battery when the voltage is < 3Vdc, reading on proper terminals without the 5V power supply on
the card.
A soldering iron with a grounded soldering tip should be used.
Remove M1 jumper during the battery replacement
Re-tin the soldering tags of the new battery in order to ensure a good soldered connection
WARNING
Do not recharge, disassemble, heat above 100°C, burn the cell. Do not short-circuit or
solder directly on the cell. Violation of the rules regarding the use of rechargeable
batteries may cause risk of fire, explosion, toxic liquid and gas to leak out. These
batteries must be eliminated with proper precautions.
5.3.3.5.2
INC Module
To remove the board, loosen the two screws and six columns on the CSB board.
5.3.3.6
COAX Relay assembly
Make sure the transponder is off/stby
Loosen the ten screws located on top of cabinet
Disconnect the coax cables connectors as follows:
1. "N" connector on DPX's modules
2. "N" connector on Dummy Load
3. Connector 26 pin on board of driver MCKX
5.3.3.7
I/O Panel
Loosen the ten screws located on top of cabinet
On rear of panel, it is possible to replace the connector or the flat cable damaged
5.3.3.8
AC/DC Module
− loosen the four front screws;
− remove the module.
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-19
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
5.3.4
Peak power output Calibration Procedure
NOTE This procedure must be carried out during the installation, in the event of substitution of module
TX100 or/and TKW and also in case the channel change.
The alignment is possible only on site (not by Remote Control)
For calibration in the presence of antenna RF cables see section 2 - Installation and for measurements of
Power Reading by the monitors, see procedures described in paragraphs 5.3.7.
TX and TKW modules are equipped with EEPROM serial memory in which are memorized the data used by
the software of automatic modulation. This software controls the leveling of the output power, specific
channel and mode operating, and the optimization of the pulse shape. A special software package
(EEPROM TX /TKW) is made for EEPROM reading and writing. This software is included in the "equipment
manager" program (see section ANNEX D in this volume).
The software (EEPROM TX /TKW) is allowed on following conditions:
1) MAINTENANCE mode (see the section ANNEX D "WINDME400 equipment manager" in this volume)
2) The two transponders should be in stand by status
3) Instruments necessary for calibration:
oscilloscope, peak power wattmeter, attenuators, spectrum analyzer
The instrumentation of test set-up for measurements is shown in figure 5.3.
Power
splitter
Attenuator:
6 dB/20W
directional
Coupler
20 dB
obstruction lights
Attenuator:
50 dB/100W
Connecteur
des monitors
de sondes
d'Antenne
Power meter
Sensor
Transmitted
Power
coupled antenna 1
probes
DME antenna
30 cm RG214 coax cableConnect. "N" male
Antenna monitors
connectors
Antenna
connector
PC
Peak
power
Meter
probe Mon.1
coax cable
Printer
13
Antenna
coax cable
11
probe Mon.2
coax cable
oscilloscope
PAD
12
Peak Power
meter
oscilloscope
DME 400
SK1
Spetrum
Analyzer
Peak
power
output
PC
Equipment DME
Spetrum
Analyzer
Printer
a) Lab. Test set-up
b) Set-up with antenna cables, installed
Figure 5.3.
5-20
Test set-up
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
5.3.4.1
DME 415 Program ACTIVATION
From "DME400 equipment manager" program in "Maintenance mode" and transponders in stand-by,
activate the software "E2prom TX/TKW", pressing, at the same time, the combination keys "CTRL+F10" on
the keyboard of the PC. The initial mask of references of figure 5.4 is shown for TRX 1 (or TRX 2 according
to the selection).
Figure 5.4.
5.3.4.2
References initial mask for alignment of 100W peak power output
TX100 Modulation - adjust peak power output for DME 415
Starting from the mask of figure 5.4, to select the following options:
From: TRX 1 or TRX 2 and Mod Trx (100Wp transmitter)
"Load from File" for the parameters' reading when one chooses of to examine the existing default
values or memorized in a file of the directory c:\>winsv\site. Click on the key "Read" of figure 5.4
to carry out the action.
"Load from TRX" when it is necessary to visualize the parameters values written in the E2prom of TX100
module. Click on the key of figure 5.4 " Read " to carry out the action (after approximately 10
seconds the data values are displayed as in example of figure 5.5).
Figure 5.5.
Vers. D, September 2005
References Mask with values for Mod Trx (example)
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-21
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
5.3.4.2.1
Meaning of the labels and data displayed (TX100)
Meaning of the labels and data displayed on figure 5.5:
NOTE: the values of the parameters reference of the fourth to eighth columns are expressed in counts,
that software of the DMD translated into voltage levels.
•
The data of the first three columns (not modifiable) individualize the beacon parameter:
Ch - beacon channel
Mode of the beacon
Freq. operating transmitter frequency: the lines of the table of figure 5.5 are 252 and they result
ordinates for increasing frequencies. Through the slide cursor, the channel of interest is reached.
•
The fourth column (Pow. Lev. 100W) is the level reference for 100W peak output power (DME415).
Value = 100 counts of default and values limits to be used: from 80 to 130 counts.
•
The fifth column (Ped. Mod - Pedestal Modulation Duration) is the modulation duration of pedestal
referred to the 10% of the maximum peak detected pulse. Note that this parameter affects the
spectrum considerably. Value = 100 counts of default and values limits to be used: from 90 to 110
counts. The change of this parameter asks the check of the spectrum signals with spectrum analyzer.
•
The sixth column (Pwr. Lev. 50W) is the level reference of power for 50W (DME415); refers to the
adjustment for the 3dB power reduction (see para. 5.3.6 Setting, "Transponder parameter"). Value =
70 counts of default and values limits to be used: from 50 to 90 counts.
•
The seventh column (Gau. Mod. 1KW - Gaussian Modulation 1KW limit - not used for DME415) is the
limit of level of the Gaussian modulation for 1KW and is employed by the DME 435 to limit the
maximum variation of the AMC (Automatic Modulation Control). Value = 180/255 counts of default and
values limits to be used: from 32 on 255 counts. (see change values in para 5.3.4.2.2 also)
•
The eighth column (Ped. Mod. 1KW - not used for DME415) Used for the voltage level calibration of
the pedestal. Is also the limit of maximum variation level of the pedestal modulation for DME435 1KW.
Value = 220/255 counts of default and values limits to be used: from 0 on 255 counts. (see change
values in para 5.3.4.2.2 also)
5.3.4.2.2
Modification of reference parameters values
Modify these parameters to select, with the pointer, the interested line of service channel and click on same
line. Therefore, click on the key of figure 5.5 "Modify". The mask "Modify References Maintenance" of
figure 5.6 will be displayed in which acting on the editable fields will be possible to perform the desired
reference changes.
Meaning of parameters displayed on figure 5.6:
•
Power Level 100W: Reference in counts for the calibration of the 100W peak power
•
Ped. Mod. Dur. duration time for modulation of the pedestal
•
Power Level 50W: Reference in counts for the calibration to -3dB reduction peak power
•
Gaussian Modulation 1KW: Not used - To always insert the value 255 counts when is used for DME
435
•
Pedestal Modulation 1KW: Pedestal level. To always insert the value 255 counts when is used for
DME 435
•
OK: press key to confirm the changes of the reference counts
•
Cancel : press key turn back to the condition without modification
5-22
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
Figure 5.6. Modify references values for Mod Trx (example)
Procedures for data change:
1) Modify the parameters (Power Level 100W), (Ped. Mod. Dur.) and (Power Level 50W):
Set in operate status the transponder TRX1 in antenna and to note the power result reading on the
"Peak Power Meter " of figure 5.3
2) Modify the values to obtain the reading of power 100Wp on Peak Power Meter. Click on button OK
after the modifications to confirm the changes
3) So ready, press key "Write EEPROM" (this will write the new parameters on E2prom of the module
and will create a file with the extension ".TMP" containing the new parameters). The box, under the
key "Write EEPROM", when illuminated, will show the advance of the process in progress.
4) Reset on module DMD to stored new arrangement (NOTE: maintain pressed the button of reset
during few seconds until to obtain lit red LED)
NOTE:. The Software of A.M.C. ("Automatic Modulation Control ") of DMD module acts as the
multiplying coefficient with the reference number for the 10% of the detected peak pulse signal
transmitted and changes the pedestal level on modulation signal. For example: one pulse
pedestal duration approximately of 5.8µs must be reduced from value current 100 (in COUNT) by
changing it into 95 (count). In this case, we will have: (95/100) * 5.8 = 0.95 * 5.8 = 5.51µs. The
5.51µs will be the new pedestal duration value; the width of pulse (measured at 50% of
amplitude) is also proportionally reduced.
REMARK: Whereas is replaced a module TX100 (and/or TKW), it is always necessary to perform the
reset hardware on DMD module with the purpose to align the DMD memory to the
EEPROMs data. The new data of the reference counts are stored in E PROM, only after
having carried out the reset on DMD
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-23
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
5.3.4.3
Notation for the calibration of RF output power of the TX100
Prepare the instrumentation as of figure 5.3
NOTES:
a) The automatic modulation control (AMC) is obtained by the signal detected at output of the TX
module, which is addressed to the entry of the converter analog/digital of DMD module.
b) Channel 1 (CH1) of the oscilloscope is joined to detected signal RF on TX 100 output present on testpoint AN36 of DMD module
c) Channel 2 (CH2) of the oscilloscope is joined to the signal of modulation V_MOD present on test-point
AN13 of TX100 module
d) The trigger of external synchronism of the oscilloscope is joined on test-point AN11 of TX100 module
Figure 5.7 shows the waveform of the signal detected "V_det" (on test point AN36 DMD) with the main
parameters in the conditions of optimal full power. The waveforms have the following definitions:
1) V_det_peak: Value of the peak voltage detected, offset level excluded. Value dependent narrowly by
the modulation peak level (Typical value = 10mVolt x Counts in EEPROM: 1Vp for 100 counts).
2) 10% width: Duration of the detected pulse on 10% of peak level (typical 5,8 µs for 100 accounts,
5,1µs for 95 accounts).
3) Offset: typical level value, approximately 100 mVolt, added in factory adj. on DMD module
CH2
Modulation Signal
V_MOD AN13 TX
Offset
Vdet_peak
Ch1
Detected Signal
TP AN36 DMD
10% width
10% Vpeak
Figure 5.7.
GND Level
Waveforms of detection for TX100
Figure 5.8 shows the waveform of the modulation signal "V_Mod" (on test point AN13 of TX100) with the
main parameters in the conditions of optimal full power. The waveforms have the following definitions:
1) Vmod_peak: Modulation peak voltage controlled by the DMD software. Values of 11Vp for the low
channels until 36Vp for the high channels
2) Vmod_ped: Modulation pedestal voltage level controlled by the DMD software to obtain one duration
to 10 % on the detected signal, (10% width). Values of 3V for the low channels until 8V for the high
channels.
3) Vmod_gauss: Peak voltage level of the modulation Gaussian part. Values of 5V for the low channels
until 30V for the high channels
4) Offset: Modulation level <1V factory adj. by the trimmer P1 of TX100 module
5) Droop_correction: Voltage difference between the peaks of the pairs pulses which, it is controlled by
the software of the DMD in order to minimize it.
5-24
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
Ch2
Modulation
Signal
V_MOD
TP AN13 TX
Vmod_ped
Vmod_peak
Offset
Vmod_ped
Offset
Vmod_peak
Ch2
Modulation
Signal
V_MOD
TP AN13 TX
Droop correction
Vmod_gauss
Vmod_gauss
955 900 031 C
GND Level
GND Level
Figure 5.8.
Waveforms of modulation for TX100
5.3.4.4
Calibration of output RF signal for TX100
1) With the equipment connected as figure 5.3 to measure the peak power output by wattmeter. The typical
precision of measurement will be: ±10% (consists of tolerance of: coupler, attenuators, ….)
2) Modify counts of the parameter "Power Level 100W" as figure 5.6 for 100 W reading on the Wattmeter of
figure 5.3.
3) Modify counts of the "Ped. Mod. Dur." parameters in order to obtain the pulse shape, similar to the
detected signal of figure 5.7. Avoid realizing pulses as in figure 5.9.
Comply with the tolerances of the pulse shape defined by ICAO as in table 5-4.
The counts " Ped. Mod. Dur." changes the values of pulse width with 10% of the peak level.
The counts "Pedestal Modulation" changes the levels of pedestal amplitude (typical value 255 counts).
Check with the spectrum analyzer which the spectrum is within the limits of the characteristics marked in
figure 5.36a) and, if necessary, to change the " Ped. Mod. Dur." count parameter for to obtain the
required results.
4) Set the transponders on standby status
5) Reset on module DMD to stored new arrangement
6) Press "Write E2prom" on figure 5.5
7) Reiterate this procedure for each counts reference values variation and for best results.
8) Repeat this procedure for Transponder 2
Table 5-4
Tolerance of pulse envelope gaussian
Envelope Gaussian - Tolerance ICAO
Pulse Rise time
Not exceed 3 μs
Pulse Decay time
Not exceed 3,5 μs
Pulse width (duration)
3,5 μs ±0,5 μs
a) Pedestal level in excess
(seen on DMD TP AN36)
Figure 5.9.
Vers. D, September 2005
b) Pedestal level deficient
(seen on DMD TP AN36)
Incorrect Gaussian Pulses shape
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-25
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
5.3.5
TKW 1KW Peak power output Calibration Procedure
NOTE This procedure must be carried out during the installation, in the event of substitution of module
TKW and also in case the channel change.
The alignment is possible only on site (not by Remote Control)
For calibration in the presence of antenna RF cables see section 2 - Installation - and for measurements of
Power Reading by the monitors, see procedures described in paragraphs 5.3.7.
TX and TKW modules are equipped with EEPROM serial memory in which are memorized the data used by
the software of automatic modulation. This software controls the leveling of the output power, specific
channel and mode operating, and the optimization of the pulse shape. A special software package
(EEPROM TX /TKW) is made for EEPROM reading and writing. This software is included in the "equipment
manager" program (see section ANNEX D in this volume).
The software (EEPROM TX /TKW) is allowed on following conditions:
1) MAINTENANCE mode (see the section ANNEX D "WINDME400 equipment manager" in this volume)
2) The two transponders should be in stand by status
3) Instruments necessary for calibration:
oscilloscope, peak power wattmeter, attenuators, spectrum analyzer
The instrumentation of test set-up for measurements is shown in figure 5.3.
5.3.5.1
DME 435 1KW Program ACTIVATION
From "DME400 equipment manager" program in "Maintenance mode" and transponders in stand-by,
activate the software "E2prom TX/TKW", pressing, at the same time, the combination keys "CTRL+F10" on
keyboard of the PC. The initial mask of references of figure 5.10 is shown for TRX 1 (or TRX 2 according to
the selection).
Figure 5.10.
5.3.5.2
References initial mask for alignment of 1KW peak power output
TKW 1KW Modulation - adjust peak power output for DME 435
Starting from the mask of figure 5.10, to select the following options:
From: TRX 1 or TRX 2 and Mod Tkw (1KWp transmitter)
5-26
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
"Load from File" for the parameters' reading when one chooses of to examine the existing default
values or memorized in a file of the directory c:\>winsv\site. Click on the key "Read" of figure 5.10
to carry out the action.
"Load from TRX" when it is necessary to visualize the parameters values written in the E2prom of TKW
module. Click on the key of figure 5.10 " Read " to carry out the action (after approximately 10
seconds the data values are displayed as in example of figure 5.11).
Check that on the operative channel, the Gau.Mod. 1KW and Ped.Mod. 1KW are "255 counts" for both. In
the opposed case, choose the channel and click on the button Modify to change the value according to
"255 "counts (see figure 5.6 f para 5.3.4.2.2) and click on the button OK. Click on the Write Eeprom key of
figure 5.6, to save the data in Eeprom of the module. Reset on DMD module to charge new arrangement
and to await initialization.
NOTE: Whereas the adjustment also of module TKW is concluded, the signal present in AN7 of TX100
will be similar on figure 5.13 and not more like figure 5.7.
Figure 5.11. References mask with values for Mod Tkw (example)
5.3.5.2.1
Meaning of the labels and data displayed (TKW)
Meaning of the labels and data displayed on figure 5.11:
NOTE: the values of the parameters reference of the fourth to sixth columns are expressed in counts,
that software of the DMD translated into voltage levels.
•
The data of the first three columns (not modifiable) individualize the beacon parameter:
Ch - beacon channel
Mode of the beacon
Freq. operating transmitter frequency: the lines of the table of figure 5.11 are 252 and they result
ordinates for increasing frequencies. Through the slide cursor, the channel of interest is reached.
•
The fourth column (Pow. Lev. 1KW) is the level reference for 1KW peak output power (DME435).
Value = 100 counts of default and values limits to be used: from 80 to 130 counts.
•
The fifth column (Ped. Mod - Pedestal Modulation Duration) is the modulation duration of pedestal
referred to the 10% of the maximum peak detected pulse. Note that this parameter affects the
spectrum considerably. Value = 100 counts of default and values limits to be used: from 90 to 110
counts. The change of this parameter asks the check of the spectrum signals with spectrum analyzer.
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-27
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
•
The sixth column (Pwr. Lev. 500W) is the level reference of reduced power at 500W (DME4135);
refers to the adjustment for the 3dB power reduction (see para. 5.3.6 Setting, "Transponder
parameter"). Value = 70 counts of default and values limits to be used: from 50 to 90 counts.
5.3.5.2.2
Modification of reference parameters values
Modify these parameters to select, with the pointer, the interested line of service channel and click on same
line. Therefore, click on the key of figure 5.11 "Modify". The mask "Modify References Maintenance" of
figure 5.12 will be displayed in which acting on the editable fields will be possible to perform the desired
reference changes.
Meaning of parameters displayed on figure 5.11
•
Power Level 1000W: Reference in counts for the calibration of the 1000W peak power
•
Ped. Mod. Dur. duration time for modulation of the pedestal
•
Power Level 500W: Reference in counts for the calibration to -3dB reduction peak power
•
OK: press key to confirm the changes of the reference counts
•
Cancel : press key turn back to the condition without modification
Figure 5.12.
Modify references values for Mod Tkw (example)
Procedures for data change:
1) Modify the parameters (Power Level 100W), (Ped. Mod. Dur.) and (Power Level 500W):
Set in operate status the transponder TRX1 in antenna and to note the power result reading on the
"Peak Power Meter " of figure 5.3
5-28
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
2) Modify the values to obtain the reading of power 1000Wp on Peak Power Meter. Click on button OK
after the modifications to confirm the changes.
3) So ready, press key "Write EEPROM" (this will write the new parameters on E2prom of the module
and will create a file with the extension ".TMP" containing the new parameters). The box, under the
key "Write EEPROM", when illuminated, will show the advance of the process in progress.
4) Reset on module DMD to stored new arrangement (NOTE: maintain pressed the button of reset
during few seconds until to obtain lit red LED)
NOTE:. The Software of A.M.C. ("Automatic Modulation Control " of DMD module) acts as the
multiplying coefficient with the reference number for the 10% of the detected peak pulse signal
transmitted and changes the pedestal level on modulation signal. For example: one pulse
pedestal duration approximately of 5.8µs must be reduced from value current 100 (in COUNT) by
changing it into 95 (count). In this case, we will have: (95/100) * 5.8 = 0.95 * 5.8 = 5.51µs. The
5.51µs will be the new pedestal duration value; the width of pulse (measured at 50% of
amplitude) is also proportionally reduced.
REMARK: Whereas is replaced a module TX100 (and/or TKW), it is always necessary to perform the
reset hardware on DMD module with the purpose to align the DMD memory to the
EEPROMs data. The new data of the reference counts are stored in E2PROM, only after
having carried out the reset on DMD
5.3.5.3
Notation for the calibration of RF output power of the TKW
Prepare the instrumentation as of figure 5.3
NOTES:
a) The automatic modulation control (AMC) is obtained by the signal detected at output of the TKW
module, which is addressed to the entry of the converter analog/digital of DMD module.
b) Channel 1 (CH1) of the oscilloscope is joined to detected signal RF on TKW output present on testpoint AN36 of DMD module
c) Channel 2 (CH2) of the oscilloscope is joined to the signal of modulation V_MOD present on test-point
AN13 of TX100 module
d) The trigger of external synchronism of the oscilloscope is joined on test-point AN11 of TX100 module
Figure 5.7 shows the waveform of the signal detected "V_det" (on test point AN36 DMD) with the main
parameters in the conditions of optimal full power. The waveforms have the following definitions:
1) V_det_peak: Value of the peak voltage detected, offset level excluded. Value dependent narrowly by
the modulation peak level. (Typical value = 10mVolt x Counts in EEPROM:1Vp for 100 counts)
2) 10% width: Duration of the detected pulse on 10% of peak level (typical 5,8 µs for 100 accounts,
5,1µs for 95 accounts).
3) Offset: typical level value, approximately 100 mVolt, added in factory adj. on DMD module
5.3.5.4
Calibration of output power RF for TKW
1) With the equipment connected as figure 5.3 to measure the peak power output by wattmeter. The typical
precision of measurement will be: ±10% (consists of tolerance of: ±1 count, coupler, attenuators, ….)
2) Modify counts of the parameter "Power Level 1000W" as figure 5.12 for 1000 W reading on the
Wattmeter of figure 5.3.
3) Modify counts of the "Ped. Mod. Dur." parameters in order to obtain the pulse shape, similar to the
detected signal of figure 5.7 (TP AN36 DMD). Avoid realizing pulses as in figure 5.9.
Comply with the tolerances of the pulse shape defined by ICAO as in table 5-4.
The counts " Ped. Mod. Dur." changes the values of pulse width with 10% of the peak level.
Check with the spectrum analyzer which the spectrum is within the limits of the characteristics marked in
figure 5.36b) and, if necessary, to change the " Ped. Mod. Dur." count parameter for to obtain the
required results.
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-29
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
4) Set the transponders on standby status
5) Reset on module DMD to stored new arrangement
6) Press "Write E2prom" on figure 5.11
7) Reiterate this procedure for each counts reference values variation and for best results
8) Repeat this procedure for Transponder 2
Ch2
Modulation
Signal
V_MOD
TP AN13 TX
Ch1
Detected Signal
TP AN7 TX
GND Level
Figure 5.13.
Pulse shape for TX100 drive of TKW (example)
5.3.6
Reduced power - Check operation
Setting power reduction as figure 5.14
Perform the check on every 4 points of figure 5.14, given on the following values of output power:
0dB
-1dB
-2dB
-3dB
OFF reduction - Corresponds to the 100% of full power
ON reduction - Corresponds to the approx. 79% of full power
ON reduction - Corresponds to the approx. 63% of full power
ON reduction - Corresponds to the approx. 50% of full power. This last level comes established
while preparing the counts indicated in figure 5.6 (for DME415) or 5.12 (for DME435).
Figure 5.14.
5-30
Setting Reduced power
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
5.3.7
955 900 031 C
Adjustment Power Monitor Reading
Reply Delay
Reply efficiency
Pulse spacing
Peak Power Output
Transmission Rate
Transmitter Freq.
Transmitted Power
50,01 µs
98 %
12.00 µs
1062 Watt
805 ppps
1020.0 MHz
1001 Watt
50,00 µs
96 %
12.00 µs
1065 Watt
805 ppps
1020.0 MHz
1000 Watt
Reply Delay
Figure 5.15.
Screen of correct measurement by Monitor 1 & 2 (Example)
To adjust value of Peak Power Output (see figure 5.15) you have to change the following value of preset:
- MON1 Power Adj
- MON2 Power Adj
The range value is from –100 to +100. See figure 5.16.
Figure 5.16.
Screen of configuration for power reading adjustment
To adjust value of Transmitted Power for both monitors, you have to change the values of preset. See
figure 5.16
- Monitor Cable Loss
- Antenna Probe Coupling
There is also a possibility to adjust value of power for each monitor, so you can align monitor1 with monitor2
by TRIMMER P6 on monitor board.
NOTE: Be careful !!!!
Vers. D, September 2005
Don’t touch any other TRIMMER on monitor board
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-31
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
5.3.8
Test Points and Led
The external test points (and LED position), to be found on the front of the beacon modules (see figures
5.17; 5.18 ; 5.23; 5.25, 5.26; 5.28; 5.30; 5.33; 5.34; 5.35) and the lists are on tables: 5-5 to 5-13.
The LED on beacon modules are listed in section 3, on table 3-7 and shown in figures 3.31 to 3.33
5.3.9
Waveform
Significant wave shapes relating to the test points are on the following pages.
The DME 415 & DME 435 equipments spectrums (typical) of the transmitted signal are shown in figures
5.36A) and 268H5.36B) respectively.
For every wave shape and for each scope channel the following information is given: scale used (in V/div),
time base (in μs/div or in ms/div) and test point providing the synchronization signal, if an external
synchronization signal is used for the measurement. If there is no synchronization indication, the
synchronization is internal.
Table 5-5.
Power Supply PWS module - External test points
PWS FAULTY (red)
TEST POINT
DESCRIPTION
TP1
Used to check for +5 V stabilized voltage. Typical
value: 5,1 ± 0,1V
TP2
Used to check for +15 V stabilized voltage. . Typical
value: +15± 0,2V
TP3
Used to check for −15 V stabilized voltage. . Typical
value: -15± 0,2V
TP4
LED
INPUT (green)
SW1
Test
points
GND
RESET
TP1 +5V
TP2 +15V
TP3 -15V
GND
SW1
Reset Pushbutton
- Check operation for verifier
transient failure of module,
when red led is lighted.
Power
Supply
PWS
PBA
Figure 5.17.
Table 5-6.
RESET
DESCRIPTION
AN11
H MORCO – Identity Code - Detected identified Morse
code signal.
AN34
OUT MUX - ADC input signals - RF pulses detected from
antenna probes
AN23
A MOD –Analog signals of the interrogation Modulation
AN 71
MEAS. SYNC. - Signal trigger on oscilloscope for BITE
measurement .
AN45
Monitors MON module - External test points
TEST
POINT
AN2
PWS outline – Test point and LED
WATCH DOG (red)
IDENTITY (green)
LED
TRX ALARM (yellow)
MON FTY (red)
EXEC. MON (green)
AN11 (H MORCO)
AN34 OUT MUX
AN23 A MOD
AN71 MEAS SYNC
AN2 LM INT
Test
points
LM INT - Start generation and acquisition signal. Trigger on
oscilloscope for check Executive Monitoring
measurements.
AN45 GND
Monitor
GND
MON
PBA
RF circuits
Casting
Figure 5.18.
5-32
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
MON outline – Test point and LED
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
CH1-ext trigger –Test Point.=AN71
CH2-63 MHz DET – Test Point internal
CH3-ADC Input – Test Point = AN34
interrogation signal
Reply Delay
CH1-ext trigger –Test Point.=AN71
CH3-ADC Input – Test Point = AN34
Reply detected by monitor
Figure 5.19.
MON module – Waveform monitor: X mode Interrogation
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-33
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
CH4-ext trigger –Test Point.=AN71
CH3-VTF signal – Test Point = internal
CH2- ON/OFF 63MHz enable – Test Point AN43
Figure 5.20.
MON module – Waveform monitor self-check: Attenuators check
CH4-ext trigger –Test Point.=AN71
CH3-VTF signal – Test Point = internal
CH2- ON/OFF 63MHz enabl.– Test Point AN 43
CH1-ADC Input – Test Point = AN34
Figure 5.21.
5-34
MON module – Waveform monitor self-check: Y mode Interrogation
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
CH4-ext trigger –Test Point.=AN71
CH3-VTF signal – Test Point = internal
CH2- ON/OFF 63MHz enabl.– Test Point AN 43
CH1-ADC Input – Test Point = AN34
NOTE:
these waveforms are visualized during the
interrogation towards the Rx. Previously acquisition by
calibration is carried out internal to the Monitor with single
pulse
Figure 5.22. MON module – Waveform monitor self-check: CALIBRATION Delay
Table 5-7.
Receivers RX module - External test points
TEST
POINT
AN51
DESCRIPTION
TOA Time of Arrival signal (N.U.).
AN
OCV analog - On Channel Validation analog signals pair pulses
AN
OCV Trigg. - On Channel Validation trigger gate digital signals
AN19
LOG N - Detected log signal output.
AN20
LOG-P - N.U.
AN7
CAL - Gate during pilot pulse Calibration. Signal trigger for log detected
measurement on oscilloscope
AN18
GND
AN51 TOA
AN 52 OCV-TR
AN 7 L-CAL
Test
points
AN19 LOG N
AN20 LOG P
AN57 OCV
AN18 GND
CH1-Log N
Test Point.=AN19
-90dBm interrog. level
Receiver
RX
PBA
RF and IF circuits
casting
Figure 5.23. RX outline – Test point and LED
Figure 5.24a. RX module – LOG N waveform Y mode
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-35
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
CH1-Log N
Test Point.=AN19
-30dBm interrog. level
Figure 5.24b. RX module – LOG N waveform X mode
Table 5-8.
Digital Processor DPR module - External test points
TEST POINT
DESCRIPTION
AN20
SQI - Squitter pulses
AN19
DPNPSQ - Squitter/reply pulses
AN18
DAEDT - Dead time signal gate
AN17
MORCO - Used to check Morse code identity
AN32
LOG - Remake log Rx signal from internal DAC
AN13
OVRL - Transmission rate overload frequency (4800 Hz)
AN56
GND
AN16
SPINH - Spacing Inhibit (minimum squitter spacing)
AN15
IDT - Identity frequency (1350 Hz)
AN52
TRGOUT - Output trigger delay-compare comparator
AN40
TOA N - TOA Output digital trigger
AN39
MOD ST - Modulation start
IDENT.(yellow)
AN5
MD - Main delay gate
AN7
HRXINH - Gate Rx inhibit during transmitted pulse
AN1
CAL - Calibration gate for scope trigger used to check pilot pulse signal
AN41
SQIDBP - Squitter-Identity (gate enable calibration pilot pulse)
AN9
GF – Gate former decoded
AN43
GND
AN11
AGRDW - N.U. (Automatic gain reduction down)
AN10
AGREN - N.U. (Automatic gain reduction enable)
AN59
NPR - Dc level of presetting Rx sensitivity.
AN51
TH COMP - Threshold TOA signal comparator
AN50
DISCH - Discharge gate TOA signal
AN57
DISAB - Disable TOA signal
AN55,AN54,AN14
Test
points
PBA
LED
AN20
AN19
AN18
AN17
AN32
AN13
AN56
SQI
DPNPSQ
DEADT
MORCO
LOG
OVRL
GND
AN16
AN55
AN15
AN54
AN14
AN52
SPINH
N.U.
IDT
N.U.
N.U.
TRGOUT
AN40 TOA N
AN39 MOD ST
AN5 MD
AN7 HRXINH
AN1 CAL
AN41 SQIDBP
AN9 GF
AN43 GND
AN11 AGRDW
AN10 AGREN
AN59 NPR
AN51 TH_COMP
AN50 DISCH
AN57 DISAB
Digital
Processor
N.U.
DPR
Figure 5.25. DPR outline – Test point and LED
5-36
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
Table 5-9.
AN57
AN50
AN51
AN10
AN59
AN11
AN9
AN43
AN41
AN8
DESCRIPTION
AN5
Trigger - N.U. (used to check specific maintenance measurement)
AN24
RF ON - Gate RF transmitter enable
AN23
LRX INH - Gate Rx inhibit
AN26
MOD N - Modulation pulse (gaussian and pedestal waveform)
AN39
AN48
DPR module – Test point position
Digital Modulator DMD module - External test points
TEST
POINT
N10
AN1
AN5
AN7
AN39
AN40
AN16
Figure 5.26
AN55
AN15
AN54
AN14
AN52
AN56
AN17
AN32
AN19
AN18
955 900 031 C
RD4
AN20
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
CALIB - Gate calibration of pilot pulse
GND
UPPER
EXTRACTOR
PBA
WDOG
(red)
MOD
(green)
CAL
(green)
LED
COD
(green)
CHK
(green)
RESET
AN5 TRIG
AN24 RF ON
AN23 RXINH
AN26 MOD N
AN10 CALIB
Test
points
AN39 GND
CM1
Pushbutton
TRx on ANT.
Modulator
DMD
LOWER
EXTRACTOR
Figure 5.27. DMD module – Waveform, X mode
Figure 5.28. DMD outline – Test point and LED
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-37
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
Figure 5.29.
DMD module – Waveform, Y mode
DC/DC converter
Table 5-10.
Transmitter /driver TX module - External test points
Heat Sink
TEST
POINT
AN17
DESCRIPTION
DC/DC converter regulated voltage - 100 W
50V/transmitter/driver)
RF ON (green)
AN13
V MOD - Video Modulation Voltage (gaussian and pedestal waveform).
AN12
N.U. (Mod P)
AN11
MOD SQR - Modulation square gate
AN7
RF DET - Output RF detected signal .
AN21
GND
RF PROT (red)
module (typical values:
LED
DC/DC ON (green)
AN17 DC/DC OUT
AN13 V MOD
AN12 MOD P - N.U.
AN11 MOD SQR
AN7 RF DET
Test
points
AN21 GND
Transmitter/driver
PBA
TX
RF circuits
casting
Figure 5.30.
5-38
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
TX outline – Test point and LED
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
Figure 5.31. TX module – Waveform – X mode
Figure 5.32.
Vers. D, September 2005
TX module – Waveform – Y mode
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-39
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
Table 5-11.
RF 1KW Amplifier TKW module (only DME 435) - External test points
TEST
POINT
DESCRIPTION
AN1
200W DC/DC regulated voltage; output value: 50V ±0,5V
AN2
Used to verify the absorption current of the final driver RF power amplifier;
typical value measured between AN2 and the reference point AN1. Typical
value: ≤350 mV (conversion factor 1 mV/1 mA).
AN3
Similar to AN2 but used to verify the current of the first final power
amplifier.
AN4
Similar to AN2 but used to verify the current of the second final power
amplifier.
AN5
Similar to AN2 but used to verify the current of the third final power
amplifier.
AN6
Similar to AN2 but used to verify the current of the fourth final power
amplifier.
AN7
Used to verify the detected RF signal output by the TKW module.
AN8
GND
1 KW Transmitter Amplifier
TKW
RF PROT (red)
RF ON (green)
LED
DC/DC ON (green)
Test
points
AN
AN
AN
AN
AN
AN
AN
DC/DC OUT
V1
V2
V3
V4
V5
RF DET
AN GND
Figure 5.33.
5-40
TKW module outline – Test point and LED
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
Table 5-12.
955 900 031 C
CSB Module Test Points
TEST
POINT
DESCRIPTION
AN1
INTSCC0-Interrupt serial
Communic. Controller -TTL
level
AN2
BT1- Backup battery -3.6 V
nom; 5 V full charge; 2.8 V
depleted
AN3
Freq. Xtal Q1 - 14745.6 kHz
- pseudo-sine wave
AN4
VBAC - RTC supply voltage
3.6 V with standard load
AN5
BRG - Baud Rate Generator
- Frequency = 7,372,800 Hz
AN6
WR - CPU Write -
AN7
RD - CPU Read -
AN8
BATF - BT1 Battery
defective or depleted Normal = Flag High
AN9
GND
AN2
BT1
AN8
BATF
Watchdog
green led
AN1
INTSCC
AN4
VBAC
TX line green led
AN5
BRG
RX line green led
CPU RESET
Pushbutton
AN7
CPU READ
AN9
GND
AN3
Freq. Q1
AN6
CPU WRITE
Figure 5.34. CSB Module – Test point position
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-41
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
Table 5-13.
AC/DC Module Test Points
TEST POINT
TP+/ TP-
V Adj
DESCRIPTION
Used to verify 54 Vout voltage.
Output voltage adjustment : ± 1 V max variation (53 to 55 Vdc)
Module OK
V adj
TP
Mains OK
AC/DC
Figure 5.35.
5-42
ACDC module – Test points and LED outline
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
Vers. D, September 2005
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
ERP
(Effective Radiated Power)
Typical value: 50 dBmp
considering:
antenna gain = 9dB and
cable loss = 0dB
5-43
Figure 5.36a). DME 415 -Typical transmitted spectrum signal
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-43
DME 415/435 -Technical Manual
Vol. 1-Section 5 - Maintenance
955 900 031 C
5-44
ERP
(Effective Radiated Power)
Typical value: 60 dBmp
considering:
antenna gain = 9dB and
cable loss = 0dB
46 dB
63 dB
800kH z
800kH z
2MHz
2MHz
Figure 5.36b). DME 435 -Typical transmitted spectrum signal
Vers. D, September 2005
THALES Italia S.p.A.- A. S. D.
5-44

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 170
Page Layout                     : OneColumn
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:cde84843-9a7f-4f1d-8c0b-d26fcb0d1641
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows)
Creator Tool                    : Acrobat PDFMaker 7.0.5 for Word
Modify Date                     : 2007:09:05 14:21:25-05:00
Create Date                     : 2006:02:07 18:51:37+01:00
Metadata Date                   : 2007:09:05 14:21:25-05:00
Document ID                     : uuid:75108e7f-a2e9-4b02-87ce-28cf989c18a0
Instance ID                     : uuid:58d26c87-e50c-45d7-814f-60c4608d75a7
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Microsoft Word - DME 400 STD eng vol 1 sect02  Instal sept05 _jan06ok_.doc
Creator                         : 
Author                          :

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Thales ATM 435 LICENSED NON-BROADCAST TRANSMITTER User Manual USERS MANUAL 2

Thales ATM LICENSED NON-BROADCAST TRANSMITTER USERS MANUAL 2

Contents

USERS MANUAL 2

FCC ID Filing: BOJ435

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation